YS1500 Indicating Controller YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller User's Manual

User’s
Manual
YS1500 Indicating Controller
YS1700 Programmable
Indicating Controller tiona
l
User’s Manual Func ment

Enha
nce
IM 01B08B02-02EN
IM 01B08B02-02EN
4th Edition
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the YS1000 series single-loop controller (hereinafter referred to as “YS1000”).
This manual describes how to use YS1500 and YS1700 functions other than YS1500’s communication function
and YS1700’s programmable and communication functions. Please read through this user’s manual carefully
before using the product.
Note that the manuals for the YS1500/YS1700 comprise the following five documents:
● Printed manual
Manual Name Manual Number Description
YS1500/YS1700 Operation Guide IM 01B08B02-01EN This manual describes the basic operation method.
● Electronic manuals
Manual Name Manual Number Description
YS1500/YS1700 Operation Guide IM 01B08B02-01EN This is identical to the printed manual.
This manual. It describes the usage of all functions except the
YS1500/YS1700 User’s Manual IM 01B08B02-02EN
programming and communication functions.
This manual describes how to use YS1000 in Ethernet, serial,
YS1000 Series Communication Interface
IM 01B08J02-01EN and DCS-LCS communications. For communication wiring,
User’s Manual
see the Operation Guide.
This manual describes how to use YSS1000 and YS1700’s
YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700
IM 01B08K02-02EN programmable function and peer-to-peer communication
Programmable Function User’s Manual
function.
This manual describes the compatibility of installation and
YS1000 Series Replacement Manual IM 01B08H02-01EN
wiring with YS100, YS80, EBS, I, EK, HOMAC, and 100 line.
User’s manuals for YS1000 are available on the following web site: www.yokogawa.com/ns/ys/im/
You need Adobe Reader 7.0 or later (but the latest version is recommended) installed on the computer in order to
open and read the manuals.
Notice
● The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice as a result of continuing improvements to the
instrument’s performance and functions.
● Every effort has been made to ensure accuracy in the preparation of this manual. Should any errors or
omissions come to your attention, however, please inform YOKOGAWA Electric’s sales office or sales
representative.
● Under no circumstances may the contents of this manual, in part or in whole, be transcribed or copied without
our permission.
Trademarks
● Our product names or brand names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation (hereinafter referred to as YOKOGAWA).
● Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
● Adobe, Acrobat, and Postscript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
● We do not use the TM or ® mark to indicate these trademarks or registered trademarks in this user's manual.
● All other product names mentioned in this user's manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
4th Edition : Dec 2019 (YK)

All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2014 Yokogawa Electric Corporation
IM 01B08B02-02EN i
How to Use This Manual
Usage
First read through the Operation Guide to understand the basic operations and then read this manual. For the
programmable functions, communication functions, and replacements, see the respective manuals.
This User’s Manual is organized into Chapters 1 to 9 as shown below:
Chapter Title and Description

1 Control Function
Describes the functions, operations, and setting items in the controller mode (single-loop, cascade, selector, and
programmable modes).
2 Auxiliary Control Function
Describes functions and setting items auxiliary to the functions described in Chapter 1.
3 Auxiliary Input and Output Functions
Describes the definition and setting items of the input and output terminals.
4 Display Function/Security Function
Provides the LCD display functions, adjustments, and setting items.
5 Adjustment of Direct Inputs (Temperature, Resistance, and Frequency)
Describes the settings and adjustments for the direct input converter built into the YS1000.
6 Power Failure Recovery Processing
Describes operations performed after momentary power interruption and power failures.
7 Self-tuning Function
Explains the self-tuning function and operations. It also describes self-tuning operations in the programmable
mode.
8 Maintenance
Describes ordinary inspections, indicating accuracy inspections, and part replacement cycles.
9 Specifications
Provides the YS1000 specifications.
ii IM 01B08B02-02EN
Symbols Used in This Manual
This symbol is used on the instrument. It indicates the possibility of injury to the user or damage to the instrument,
and signifies that the user must refer to the user’s manual for special instructions. The same symbol is used in the
user’s manual on pages that the user needs to refer to, together with the term “WARNING” or “CAUTION.”
WARNING
Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user, and indicates precautions
that should be taken to prevent such occurrences.
CAUTION
Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause injury to the user or damage to the instrument or property
and indicates precautions that should be taken to prevent such occurrences.
Note
Identifies important information required to operate the instrument.
Indicates related operations or explanations for the user’s reference.
[ ]
Indicates a character string displayed on the display.
Setting Display
Indicates a setting display and describes the keystrokes required to display the relevant setting display.
Setting Details
Provides the descriptions of settings.
Description
Describes restrictions, etc. regarding a relevant operation.
IM 01B08B02-02EN iii
Blank Page
Contents 1
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................i 2
How to Use This Manual ................................................................................................................... ii
Symbols Used in This Manual ......................................................................................................... iii
3
Chapter 1 Control Function
1.1 Selecting the Controller Mode (CTL)................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 Control in the Single-loop Mode (CTL = SINGLE) .................................................................1-3 4
n Single-loop Control Function ..............................................................................................1-6
n Automatic Control/Manual Control ......................................................................................1-7
(1) Performing control using YS1000 only ....................................................................1-8
5
n Automatic Control/Manual Control/Cascade Setting Automatic Control ...........................1-10
(1) Performing control based on an external setpoint from analog input ....................1-13
(2) Performing control based on an external setpoint through communication, or
backup operation if the high-level computer fails in communication. ....................1-16
6
(3) Performing control based on an external manipulated output variable through
communication, or backup operation if the high-level computer fails in
communication ......................................................................................................1-19 7
1.1.2 Control in the Cascade Mode (CTL = CAS) .........................................................................1-23
n Cascade Control Function ................................................................................................1-26
n Automatic Control/Manual Control.....................................................................................1-27 8
(1) Performing control using YS1000 only ..................................................................1-29
(1) Performing control based on an external setpoint from analog input ....................1-36
(2) Performing control based on an external setpoint through communication/backup
9
operation if the high-level computer fails in communication .................................1-40
(3) Performing control based on an external manipulated output variable through
communication, or backup operation if the high-level computer fails in Index
communication ......................................................................................................1-46
1.1.3 Control in the Selector Mode (CTL = SELECT) ....................................................................1-51
n Selector Control Function .................................................................................................1-54
n Automatic Control/Manual Control ....................................................................................1-55
(1) Performing control using YS1000 only for both loops 1 and 2 ..............................1-57
(1) Controlling loop 1 using YS1000 only and loop 2 based on an external setpoint
from analog input ..................................................................................................1-64
(2) Controlling loop 1 based on an external setpoint from analog input and loop 2
using YS1000 only ................................................................................................1-69
(3) Controlling both loops 1 and 2 based on external setpoints from analog inputs....1-73
(4) Loop 1 is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication
(backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication), while loop 2 is
controlled by YS1000 only. ...................................................................................1-78
(5) Loop 1 is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication
(backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication), while loop 2 is
based on an external setpoint from analog input. .................................................1-84
(6) Control is performed based on an external manipulated output variable through
communication (backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication). ...1-91
(7) Performing control based on external manipulated output variable through
communication (backing it up if the high-level computer fails in communication)
and based on an external setpoint for loop 2 from analog input ...........................1-96
1.1.4 Control in the Programmable Mode (CTL = PROG) (YS1700 Only) ..................................1-103
1.2 Selecting the Control Method (Selecting Control Type CNT and Control Operation Formula ALG) .. 1-104
1.2.1 Performing Stable Control without Abrupt Output Changes (PV Proportional Type PID (I-PD)) ..1-106
1.2.2 Performing Control with Emphasis on Setpoint Follow-up (PV Derivative Type PID (PI-D)) ...1-107
IM 01B08B02-02EN v
1.2.3 Stopping Integral Action to Conduct Control with Less Overshoot (Output Limiter) ...........1-108
1.2.4 Performing Stable Control in Which a Setpoint is not Exceeded (Proportional (PD) Control) ....1-109
1.2.5 Performing Control with Quick Rise (PID Control with Reset Bias) ................................... 1-112
1.2.6 Performing Stable Control for the Step Response of Setpoints (Adjustable Setpoint Filter) ... 1-114
1.2.7 Performing Control with Gain Characteristics Such as Neutralization Control (Non-linear
PID Control) ....................................................................................................................... 1-117
1.2.8 Performing Control Canceling out Disturbance (Feedforward Control) ..............................1-121
1.2.9 Controlling a Process with Long Dead Time (Sample-and-hold PI Control).......................1-124
1.2.10 Performing Control with Rapidly Settling Setpoints (Batch PID Control (YS1700
Programmable Mode Only)) ...............................................................................................1-126
1.2.11 Performing Control Switching Multiple PID Parameters (Preset PID (YS1700
Programmable Mode Only)) ...............................................................................................1-127
Chapter 2 Auxiliary Control Function

2.1 Compensating or Computing Process Variables (Multi-function Mode Only) ................... 2-1
2.1.1 Input Filter (First-order Lag Operation) ..................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 Square Root Extraction (Low Cutoff Adjustable) ....................................................................2-1
2.1.3 10-segment Linearizer Function .............................................................................................2-2
2.1.4 Ratio Operation.......................................................................................................................2-3
2.2 Using the Tracking Function (Multi-function Mode Only) .................................................. 2-4
2.2.1 Output Tracking ......................................................................................................................2-4
2.2.2 Cascade Setting Value Tracking (Single-loop Mode Only) .....................................................2-5
2.2.3 Process Variable Tracking (Single-loop Mode Only) ..............................................................2-6
2.3 Changing the Control Operation Direction and Valve Direction ....................................... 2-7
2.4 Using Preset MV .............................................................................................................. 2-8
2.5 Using the Event Function ................................................................................................. 2-9
2.5.1 Displaying Messages (Event Display Function (Settable Only in YSS1000) .........................2-9
2.5.2 Changing the PV Bar Display Color in the Event of a Process Alarm (Active Color Display Function) ... 2-11
2.5.3 Operator Notification Using Tag Number Display (Alternate Tag Number Color Display Function) ...2-12
2.6 Setting the Alarm Function ............................................................................................. 2-13
2.7 Setting Alarm Output Hysteresis .................................................................................... 2-14
Chapter 3 Auxiliary Input and Output Functions

3.1 Defining Digital Input and Output Functions (Multi-function Mode Only) .......................... 3-1
3.1.1 Switching Digital Terminals between Input and Output...........................................................3-2
3.1.2 Switching Digital Input Contact Type.......................................................................................3-2
3.1.3 Switching Digital Output Contact Type....................................................................................3-3
3.1.4 Changing Digital Input Functions............................................................................................3-4
(1) Automatic switching (E-AUT) ......................................................................................3-4
(2) Manual switching (E-MAN) .........................................................................................3-4
(3) Preset MV switching (E-PMV) ....................................................................................3-5
(4) Output tracking switching (E-TRK) .............................................................................3-5
(5) Output preset and manual switching (TR-MPMV) ......................................................3-5
(6) Self-tuning switching (E-STC) ....................................................................................3-6
(7) Cascade open/close switching (E-O/C) ......................................................................3-6
(8) Loop 2 local/remote switching (E-L/R) .......................................................................3-6
(9) Selector selection (E-SEL) .........................................................................................3-6
(10) LCD backlight off (LCD-OFF) ...................................................................................3-7
(11) Manual switching (TR-MAN), automatic switching (TR-AUT), and cascade
switching (TR-CAS) ................................................................................................3-7
(12) Output loop selection (E-LPSEL).............................................................................3-7
(13) All event elimination (TR-EVT.C).............................................................................3-7
3.1.5 Changing Digital Output Functions.........................................................................................3-9
3.2 Switching Analog Output 3’s Voltage and Current .......................................................... 3-13
3.3 Changing the Output Types of Analog Outputs 2, 3 and 4 ............................................. 3-14
vi IM 01B08B02-02EN
1
Chapter 4 Display and Security Functions
4.1 Display Function................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 Setting Visible/Invisible Status of the Operation Display.........................................................4-1 2
4.1.2 Setting Visible/Invisible Status of TREND Display Data .........................................................4-3
4.1.3 Changing the Time Span of TREND Displays.........................................................................4-4
4.1.4
4.1.5
Setting Display Data on the TREND 3 Display........................................................................4-5
Changing Scale Divisions on the LOOP, TREND, and DUAL Displays ..................................4-6
3
4.1.6 Automatic Scale Divisions/Making Scale Values More Legible on the METER Display ...... 4-7
4.1.7 Selecting the Operation Display to be Displayed First at Power ON......................................4-8
4.1.8 Turning the LCD Backlight ON/OFF........................................................................................4-9 4
4.1.9 Changing the Background and Loop Colors.........................................................................4-10
4.1.10 Adjusting LCD Brightness..................................................................................................... 4-11
4.2 Security Function............................................................................................................. 4-12 5
4.2.1 Setting/Releasing Keylock ...................................................................................................4-12
4.2.2 Inhibiting/Enabling Parameter Change.................................................................................4-13
6
Chapter 5 Adjusting Direct Inputs (Temperature/Resistance/Frequency)
5.1 List of Direct Input Specifications and Basic Operations................................................... 5-1
5.2 Setting Sensor Type ......................................................................................................... 5-4 7
5.3 Setting Burnout.................................................................................................................. 5-5
5.4 Making Zero and Span Adjustments of Input ................................................................... 5-6
8
Chapter 6 Processing during Power Failures
6.1 Processing during Power Failures..................................................................................... 6-1
9
Chapter 7 Self-tuning Function
7.1 Overview of Self-tuning Function...................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 What is Self-tuning?................................................................................................................7-1 Index
7.1.2 Features and Usage Effects ...................................................................................................7-1
7.2 Operation Principle............................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.1 Self-tuning ..............................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.2 Response Monitoring .............................................................................................................7-2
7.2.3 Estimating Process Characteristics ........................................................................................7-2
7.2.4 PID Parameter Tuning ............................................................................................................7-3
7.3 Self-tuning Parameters and Operations ........................................................................... 7-4
7.3.1 Parameters and Operations....................................................................................................7-4
7.4 Self-tuning (STC) Operations in Each Operation Mode.................................................. 7-10
7.4.1 STC Mode Selection = ATSTUP............................................................................................ 7-11
7.4.2 STC Mode Selection = DISP ................................................................................................7-12
7.4.3 STC Mode Selection = ON ...................................................................................................7-13
7.4.4 STC Mode Selection = OFF .................................................................................................7-13
7.4.5 On-demand Tuning (OD) ......................................................................................................7-13
7.4.6 Starting and Stopping the Self-tuning Function ....................................................................7-14
7.4.7 Combining STC with Various Control Functions ..................................................................7-18
7.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms ................................................................................................................7-20
7.5 Simulation Test ............................................................................................................... 7-22
7.5.1 Scope of Application .............................................................................................................7-22
7.5.2 Simulation Examples ............................................................................................................7-22
7.6 Application Guide............................................................................................................ 7-24
7.6.1 Stable Control Loop (Continuous Control) ...........................................................................7-24
7.6.2 Controlling Processes Where Dead Time is a Dominant Factor ..........................................7-24
7.6.3 Cascade Control ..................................................................................................................7-24
7.6.4 Following Fluctuations in Controlled System Characteristics (Dead Time, Lag Time, and Gain) ...7-25
7.6.5 Neutralization Process .........................................................................................................7-25
IM 01B08B02-02EN vii
7.6.6 Controlling Tank Levels Having Integral Characteristics ......................................................7-26
7.6.7 Control of Process with Hysteresis Characteristics ..............................................................7-26
7.6.8 Control of Process with Slow Response of Final Control Element .......................................7-27
7.6.9 Control Using Program Pattern ............................................................................................7-27
7.6.10 Combining Control with Sequence Control (Batch Control) .................................................7-28
7.6.11 Control of Loops with Interference .......................................................................................7-28
7.6.12 Control of a Loop Having Impulse Noise ..............................................................................7-29
Chapter 8 Maintenance
8.1 Inspecting Indication Accuracy ......................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Calibration Instruments...........................................................................................................8-1
8.1.2 Inspecting Input Indication Accuracy.......................................................................................8-2
8.1.3 Inspecting Output Indication Accuracy ...................................................................................8-2
8.2 Recommended Part Replacement Period ........................................................................ 8-3
8.3 Packaging when Shipping the Product for Repair ............................................................ 8-4
Chapter 9 Specifications
9.1 General Specifications...................................................................................................... 9-1
Input and Output Signals ....................................................................................................................9-1
Isolation of Signals from Each Other.......................................................................................9-3
Transmitter Power Supply ......................................................................................................9-4
Communication Signal Specifications.....................................................................................9-4
Operating Conditions ..........................................................................................................................9-5
Reference Operating Conditions ............................................................................................9-6
Reference Performance..........................................................................................................9-6
Influence of Operating Conditions...........................................................................................9-7
Direct Input Specifications.......................................................................................................9-7
Structure, Mounting (Basic Type)............................................................................................9-9
Safety Standards...................................................................................................................9-10
Index
Revision Information
viii IM 01B08B02-02EN
Chapter 1 Control Function
1.1 Selecting the Controller Mode (CTL) 1
Control Function
Setting Display
Engineering Display Operation Display > + keys (to the Tuning Menu
SHIFT
Display) > + keys (to the Engineering Menu Display)

SHIFT
> [CONFIG1] software key (Configuration Display 1)
0101E.ai
Setting Details
Parameter Name Setting Range Factory Default

PROG: Programmable mode (*1)
Controller mode SINGLE: Single-loop mode For YS1500: SINGLE
CTL
selection CAS: Cascade mode For YS1700: PROG
SELECT: Selector mode
*1: Selectable only in YS1700
► For programmable mode: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable Function
User's Manual.
Description
YS1500 has the following three control functions (controller mode).
Single-loop mode, cascade mode, and selector mode, which are generically called the
“multi-function mode.”
Setting up the controller mode allows the indicating controller to operate as a single-loop,
cascade, or selector controller.
The multi-function mode's control period is 100 ms.
Single-loop mode (SINGLE) ► 1.1.1
Multi-function
YS1500
mode
Cascade mode (CAS) ► 1.1.2

control function
Selector mode (SELECT) ► 1.1.3

0101-01E.ai
YS1500 Control Function
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-1
1.1 Selecting the Controller Mode (CTL)
YS1700 is a programmable controller enabling the user to freely create computation and
control functions. YS1700's control functions include the programmable mode and the
same multi-function mode (single-loop, cascade, and selector modes) as that of YS1500.
Use of the multi-function mode enables YS1700 to have the same functions as YS1500,
eliminating the need for creating user programs.
The multi-function mode's control period is 100 ms. The control period in the
programmable mode can be selected from among 50, 100, and 200 ms, which is
achieved using YSS1000 Setting Software (available as an option).
YS1700 Programmable mode (user programs) (PROG) ► 1.1.4
control function
Single-loop mode (SINGLE) ► 1.1.1

Multi-function
Same functions as
mode
Cascade mode (CAS) ► 1.1.2

those of YS1500
Selector mode (SELECT) ► 1.1.3

0101-02E.ai
YS1700 Control Function
1-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN
1.1.1 Control in the Single-loop Mode (CTL = SINGLE) 1

In the single-loop mode, YS1000 operates as a single-loop controller. When the single-
loop mode is selected, YS1000 configures the functions as shown in the figure below.
Control Function
Setting and changing the parameters (in blue bold characters) shown in the figure
enables the required function to be realized.
► For parameters: see “List of Parameters” in the YS1500 Indicating Controller/YS1700
Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-3
1-4
DI7
(*1)
(DI7F = Function not set)
DI8
DI9 DI function selection
(DI9F = Function not set) DI1
DI10 (Parameter DI1F : Cascade setting input Measurement input Feedforward input Output tracking input
(DI10F = Function not set) Function not set) X2 X1 X4 X3
ON ON Input filter Input filter

CSR1 PSR1 FLG TLG
Square root Square root
extraction and OFF extraction and low OFF FIN
low cutoff adjustable cutoff adjustable ON
CLC1 PLC1 FSW
OFF Gain and bias

Input filter FGN (FIN+FBI) +FBO
CLG1 ON
FX1
CIN1
ON 10-segment line OFF
CSW1 conversion FON
101 to 111 OFF
Ratio and bias OFF ON
CGN1 (CIN1+CBI1)+
CBO1
SV PV Input filter
display display PLG1
SV key
(CMOD1=CAS)
Process variable alarms
DIn=OPEN (AUT) PH1,PL1,HH1,LL1,
DIn=CLOSE VL1
(CAS)
C/A external switching PV1

SV1
(Note 1) DInF=E-AUT –
P
F Deviation alarm
Parameter DL1
P FKEY=STC
PF key operation Self-tuning Control elements

STC CNT1,ALG1
STC start (Note 1)

DInF=E-STC FF1
+
IM 01B08B02-02EN
DIn=CLOSE
Output tracking (Note 1) DIn=OPEN TRK1
DInF=E-TRK
Output preset MV and
MAN (Note 1) Preset MV
IM 01B08B02-02EN
DInF=TR-MPMV PMV1
DIn=CLOSE
Preset MV switching (Note 1) DIn=OPEN
DInF=E-PMV
Switching by pressing “C” (Note 1)
DInF=TR-CAS
Switching by pressing “A” (Note 1) Output limiters
DInF=TR-AUT MH1,ML1 MV key
Switching by pressing “M” (Note 1) < >
DInF=TR-MAN DIn=CLOSE
DIn=OPEN
C, A/M external switching

(Note 1)
DInF=E-MAN
DInF,DIn LCD
(n=1, 7, 8, 9, 10) backlight
Backlight OFF (Note 1)
DInF=LCD-OFF
MV
Note 1: One of them can be selected. display
Moreover, changing DI/DO function assignment
enables multiple contacts to be selected.
*1: Expandable I/O terminal of YS1700 basic type

(with expandable I/O)
Y3 Y4 Y2 Y1 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO7

SV output PV output MV output 2 MV output 1 C, A/M status C/A, M status PV velocity PV low-limit PV high-limit (DO7F = Function not set)
(1–5 V) (1–5 V) (1–5 V) (4–20 mA) output output alarm output alarm output alarm output DO8
(Parameter (Parameter (Parameter (Parameter (Parameter (Parameter (Parameter (Parameter (DO8F = Function not set)
Y3S = SV1) Y4S = PV1) Y2S = MV1) DO5F = DO4F = CAS) DO3F = VL1) DO2F = PL1) DO1F = PH1) DO9
(*1) CASAUT) (DO9F = Function not set)
DO10
(DO10F = Function not set)
(*1)
0102E.ai
Single-loop Mode Function Block Diagram (for YS1700)
1-5
Control Function
n Single-loop Control Function
Control elements
Control type: Standard PID control, proportional (PD) control, or sample-and-hold PI
control
Control operation formulas: For standard PID control, select the formula from the
following:
• PV proportional type PID (I-PD)
• PV derivative type PID (PI-D)
• Adjustable setpoint filter (SVF)
For proportional (PD) control, be sure to select PV derivative type PID (PI-D).
► For control types and control operation formulas: see 1.2, Selecting the Control Method (Selecting
Control Type CNT and Control Operation Formula ALG), in this manual.
Main parameter functions

Main Functions Reference Destination
Filter function 2.1.1, Input Filter (First-order Lag Operation)
Square root extraction 2.1.2, Square Root Extraction (Low Cutoff Adjustable)
10-segment line 2.1.3, 10-segment Linearizer Function
Ratio, gain, and bias functions 2.1.4, Ratio Operation
Alarm function 3.1.5, Changing Digital Output Functions
Self-tuning function Chapter 7, Self-tuning Function
Preset MV function 2.4, Using Preset MV
1.2.3, Stopping Integral Action to Conduct Control with
Output limiter function
Less Overshoot (Output Limiter)
Other functions
Contact input function
Chapter 3, Auxiliary Input and Output Functions
Contact output function
Display function Chapter 4, Display and Security Functions
YS1000 Series Communication Interface User's
Communication function
Manual
1-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN
n Automatic Control/Manual Control 1
Control Function
Setting Display
Engineering Display Operation Display > +
SHIFT
keys (to the Tuning Menu
Display) > +
SHIFT
keys (to the Engineering Menu Display)
0103E.ai
Setting Details
To perform automatic control/manual control only, set CMOD1 = − (no setting). The
operations described in “(1) Performing control using YS1000 only” apply.

−: No setting
CMOD1 C-mode 1 CAS: Analog cascade setting mode − (no setting)
CMP: Computer cascade setting mode
Description
The operation mode can be switched by pressing the “A” or “M” mode key on the
instrument's front panel.
Automatic control (A) if the “A” mode key is pressed

Manual control (M) if the “M” mode key is pressed
Switching to each operation mode can be achieved based on digital input (DI), through
communication, or using user programs in addition to using keys on the instrument's
front panel.
► For switching using keys on the instrument's front panel: see YS1500 Indicating Controller/
YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide.
► For switching through communication: see YS1000 Series Communication Interface User's
Manual.
► For switching based on digital input: see 3.1, Defining Digital Input and Output Functions
(Multi-function Mode Only), in this manual.
► For switching using user programs: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable
Function User's Manual.
Meaning of Symbols
The following shows the operation mode symbols and their meanings:
Symbol Meaning
(M) Manual control (M)
(A) Automatic control (A)
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-7
(1) Performing control using YS1000 only

Only automatic control (A) or manual control (M) is available. Operation does not change
even if the C mode key on the instrument's front panel is pressed.
Parameter Name Setpoint

CMOD1 C-mode 1 −: No setting
Measurement input
X1
Process variable (PV1)
3/
. “A” lamp or “M” lamp lights.
–
Setpoint (SV1)

Control element
CNT1
(M)
(A)
Manipulated output variable (MV1)
Y1
Manipulated output
0104E.ai
Function Block Diagram and Operation Mode Relationship Diagram
1-8 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Automatic control AUT 1

A
Control Function
(A)
AUT MAN
Manual control A

(M)
M
MAN
A : Pressing the “A” mode key M : Pressing the “M” mode key
*: Operation does not change even if the C mode key is pressed.

AUT, MAN, CAS: Sends a communication commands (YS protocol)
0105E.ai
Status Transition Diagram When the Operation Mode is Changed Using Keys or through
Communication
Display Status of the Instrument's Front Panel in Each Operation Mode

Instrument's Front
Operation Mode
Panel Lamps
Automatic control (A) “A” lamp lights.
Manual control (M) “M” lamp lights.
Setpoints and Manipulated Output Variables in Each Operation Mode

Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1) Manipulated Output Variable (MV1)
Set using a key or through
Automatic control (A) Outputs control operation results.
communication (*1)
Set using a key or through Set using a key or through
Manual control (M)
communication (*1) communication (*2)
*1: Set to communication register SV1
*2: Set to communication register MV1
► For setting through communication: see YS1000 Series Communication Interface User's
Manual.
Control Status Effected Instantly Upon Transition to Each Operation Mode
Operation Mode Status Effected Instantly Upon Transition to Each Operation Mode
Transition Setpoint (SV1) Control Status
The setpoint immediately The manipulated output variable immediately before
(A) → (M)
before transition is held. transition is held, enabling manual operation.
Switching is made bumplessly with the manipulated
The setpoint immediately
(M) → (A) output variable immediately before transition used as
before transition is held.
the initial value for performing automatic control.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-9
n Automatic Control/Manual Control/Cascade Setting Automatic Control
Setting Display
Engineering Display Operation Display > + SHIFT
Display) > +
SHIFT
0106E.ai
Setting Details
To perform automatic control, manual control, or cascade setting automatic control, set
CMOD1 = CAS or CMP.
Any of operations (1) to (3) is performed according to the setting.
(1) Operation is controlled based on an external setpoint from analog input.
(2) Operation is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication, or
backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication.
(3) Operation is controlled based on an external manipulated output variable through
communication, or backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication.
−: No setting
CMOD1 C-mode 1 CAS: Analog cascade setting mode − (No setting)
Backup BUA: Automatic operation backup mode
BMOD1 BUM
mode 1 BUM: Manual operation backup mode
Description
The operation mode can be switched to the following three types by pressing the “C,” “A,”
or “M” mode keys on the instrument's front panel.

Cascade setting automatic control (C) if the “C” mode key is pressed
In addition to the keys on the instrument's front panel, switching to each operation mode
can be achieved based on digital input (DI), through communication, or using user
programs.
Manual.
1-10 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Cascade setting automatic control (C mode) 1

Cascade setting automatic control (C) is a mode in which control is performed based on
an external setpoint (SV) (through communication or from analog input).
Control Function
Cascade setting automatic control (C),* requiring use of the “C” mode key, performs
different operations depending on the setting of the C-mode 1 (CMOD1) parameter.
In cascade setting automatic control (C), there is the analog cascade setting mode (CAS)
and the computer cascade setting mode (CMP). Moreover, the computer cascade setting
mode (CMP) has SPC and DDC modes.
*: Cascade setting automatic control is not (internal) cascade control. For cascade control, see
1.1.2, Control in the Cascade Mode (CTL = CAS).
Cascade Mode Communication

(Parameter CMOD1) Mode
Analog cascade setting mode (CAS) −
Cascade setting automatic control SPC mode (*)

Computer cascade setting mode (CMP)
(C) DDC mode (*)
No setting (−) −
*: Selection of the SPC or DDC mode is accomplished using communication register LS1.
These modes cannot be set from the instrument's front panel.
Write “SPC” to LS1 to use cascade setting automatic control in the SPC mode, or “DDC” to
use it in the DDC mode.
The SV key cannot be operated in the SPC mode.
The SV and MV keys cannot be operated in the DDC mode.
► For SPC and DDC modes: see YS1000 Series Communication Interface User's Manual.
Backup mode
The backup mode is available in the computer cascade setting mode (CMOD1 = CMP).
If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by
YS1000's communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer
has failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically
changes the operation mode. This operating status is called “backup mode” and there
are the following two types of backup mode. Backup mode is set using the backup mode
1 (BMOD1) engineering parameter.
Automatic operation backup mode (BUA):

The transition of operation from cascade setting automatic control (C) to the automatic
operation backup mode (BUA) is equivalent to automatic control (A). In this mode, the
“C” lamp is lit and the “A” lamp blinks on the instrument's front panel. If the high-level
computer recovers communication in this condition, operation changes to cascade
setting automatic control (C).
Manual operation backup mode (BUM):

The transition of operation from cascade setting automatic control (C) to manual
operation backup mode (BUM) is equivalent to manual control (M). In this mode, the
“C” lamp is lit and the “M” lamp blinks on the instrument's front panel. If the high-level
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-11
Meaning of Symbols
Symbol Meaning
Cascade setting automatic control (C) – analog cascade setting mode (CAS)
(C) (CAS)
status
Cascade setting automatic control (C) – computer cascade setting mode (CMP)
(C) (CMP) (SPC)
– cascade backup mode (SPC) status based on an external setpoint
(C) (CMP) (DDC) – cascade backup mode (DDC) status based on an external manipulated
output variable
Manual operation backup status due to a communication failure by the high-
level computer
(BUM) (Same operation as manual control is performed and control automatically
returns to cascade setting automatic control if the communication failure is
cleared.)
Automatic operation backup status due to a communication failure by the
high-level computer
(BUA) (Same operation as automatic control is performed and control automatically
returns to cascade setting automatic control if the communication failure is
cleared.)
1-12 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(1) Performing control based on an external setpoint from analog input 1

YS1000 accepts an external setpoint from an analog input (terminal X2) to perform
Control Function
control.

CMOD1 C-mode 1 CAS: Analog cascade setting mode
Cascade setting input Measurement input
X2 X1
“C” , “A” , or
“M” lamp lights.
(C)
–
[CAS] is displayed
in cascade control. Setpoint (SV1)
(A)
An analog cascade Control element

setting value is CNT1
displayed.
(M) (A)/(C)
Y1
Manipulated output
0107E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-13
Cascade setting automatic control Automatic AUT

control
A
C A AUT
(C)
CAS (A)
(CAS)
CAS C
(A): Automatic control status
(M): Manual control status
M M (C): Analog cascade setting automatic
control status
Manual control AUT A : Pressing the “A” mode key

MAN
A
M : Pressing the “M” mode key
(M) MAN
C : Pressing the “C” mode key
C M AUT, MAN, CAS:

Sends a communication
CAS,MAN commands (YS protocol)
0108E.ai
Communication

Instrument's
LOOP 1 or METER 1 Display's
Operation Mode Front Panel
Control Status Display Section
Lamps
Manual control (M) “M” lamp lights. No display (*1)
Automatic control (A) “A” lamp lights. No display (*1)
Cascade setting automatic control (C)
“C” lamp lights [CAS] is displayed. (*1)
(CAS)
*1: [CSV1] (cascade setting input value) is displayed on the LOOP 1 Display.
Setpoints, Manipulated Output Variables, and Control Status in Each Operation Mode
Manipulated Output Control
Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1)
Variable (MV1) Status
Set using a key or
Set using a key or through
Manual control (M) through communication Manual
communication (*1)
(*2)
Automatic control Set using a key or through Outputs control
Automatic
(A) communication (*1) operation results.
Cascade setting
External setpoint from analog input Outputs control
automatic control Cascade
(terminal X2) operation results.
(C) (CAS)
Manual.
1-14 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Status Effected Instantly Upon Transition to Each Operation Mode 1

Status Effected Instantly Upon Transition to Each Operation Mode
Operation Mode Transition
Setpoint (SV1) Control Status
Control Function
Switching from (M) to (C) (CAS) is impossible. (Switch once from (M) to (A) and then switch
(M) → (C) (CAS)
from (A) to (C) (CAS)).
Switching is made bumplessly using the manipulated output
(M) → (A) variable immediately before transition used as the initial value to
perform automatic control.
Responds to cascade Switching is made bumplessly to perform cascade setting
(A) → (C) (CAS)
setting value quickly. automatic control.
The setpoint immediately The manipulated output variable immediately before transition is
(A) → (M)
before transition is held. held, enabling manual operation.
(C) (CAS) → (A) Switching is made bumplessly to perform automatic control.
The setpoint immediately The manipulated output variable immediately before transition is
(C) (CAS) → (M)
before transition is held. held, enabling manual operation.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-15
(2) Performing control based on an external setpoint through communication, or backup

operation if the high-level computer fails in communication.
YS1000 accepts an external setpoint through communication to perform control. If the

high-level computer generally performing control fails in communication, the YS1000
backs up operation. If the computer recovers communication, control returns to the
original condition.

CMOD1 C-mode 1 CMP: Computer cascade setting mode
BUA: Automatic operation backup mode
BMOD1 Backup mode 1
BUM: Manual operation backup mode
Register Name Setpoint

LS1 Operation mode 1 SPC: SPC mode
Measurement input
RS-485 communication X1
Communication
parameter SV1
“C” , “A” , or
(C)
[SPC] is displayed in
cascade control. –
In backup mode Setpoint (SV1)
(A)/(BUA)
condition, [BUA] or
[BUM] is displayed.
Control element
CNT1
(M)/(BUM) (A)/(BUA)/(C)
Y1
Manipulated output
0109E.ai
1-16 IM 01B08B02-02EN
For use of the backup mode 1

Parameter: BMOD1
Control Function
If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level
computer is lost during the period set by
M (BUM) (BUA) A YS1000's communication watchdog timer, the
YS1000 determines that the computer has failed
in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects
MAN AUT
AUTO from it and automatically changes the operation
mode.
If communication fails, the operation mode
Communication Communication changes to (BUM) or (BUA). If communication
failed recovered recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (SPC).
Cascade setting automatic control Automatic control
SPC
C
(C) A AUT
(CMP) (A) AUT
(SPC) SPC C A
M M
Manual AUT A : Pressing the “A” mode key

control MAN
A M : Pressing the “M” mode key
(M) MAN
M AUT, MAN, SPC, DDC:

Sends a communication commands
MAN
(YS protocol)
0120E.ai
Communication
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-17

Instrument's Front
Operation Mode Panel
Lamps
Manual control (M) “M” lamp lights. No display
Automatic control (A) “A” lamp lights. No display
Cascade setting automatic control (C) (CAS) (SPC) “C” lamp lights [SPC] is displayed.
Automatic operation backup status due to communication failure by “C” lamp lights and
[BUA] is displayed.
the high-level computer (BUA) the “A” lamp blinks.
Manual operation backup status due to communication failure by the “C” lamp lights and
[BUM] is displayed.
high-level computer (BUM) the “M” lamp blinks.
Manipulated Output Control
Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1)
Variable (MV1) Status
Manual control (M) Manual
Set using a key or through Outputs control operation
Automatic control (A) Automatic
communication (*1) results.
Set through communication Outputs control operation
Cascade setting automatic control (C) (CMP) (SPC) Cascade
(*1) results.
Automatic operation backup status due to communication Set using a key or through Outputs control operation
Automatic
failure by the high-level computer (BUA) communication (*1) results.
Manual operation backup status due to communication Set using a key or through Set using a key or through
Manual
failure by the high-level computer (BUM) communication (*1) communication (*2)
Manual.

Switching from (M) to (C) (CMP) (SPC) is impossible. (Switch once from (M) to (A)
(M) → (C) (CMP) (SPC)
and then switch from (A) to (C) (CMP) (SPC)).
The setpoint Performs cascade setting automatic control with the
(BUM) → (C) (CMP) (SPC) immediately before manipulated output variable immediately before transition
transition is held. used as the initial value.
The setpoint Switching is made bumplessly with the manipulated
(M) or (BUM) → (A) immediately before output variable immediately before transition used as the
transition is held. initial value to perform automatic control.
The setpoint
Switching is made bumplessly to perform cascade
(A) or (BUA) → (C) (CMP) (SPC) immediately before
setting automatic control.
transition is held.
The setpoint
The manipulated output variable immediately before
(A) or (BUA) → (M) immediately before
transition is held, enabling manual operation.
transition is held.
The setpoint
Switching is made bumplessly to perform automatic
(C) (CMP) (SPC) → (A) or (BUA) immediately before
control.
transition is held.
The setpoint
(C) (CMP) (SPC) → (M) or (BUM) immediately before
transition is held.
1-18 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(3) Performing control based on an external manipulated output variable through communication, 1
or backup operation if the high-level computer fails in communication
Control Function
YS1000 accepts an external manipulated output variable through communication
to perform control. If the high-level computer generally performing control fails
in communication, the YS1000 backs up operation. If the computer recovers
communication, control returns to the original condition.

BMOD1 Backup mode 1

LS1 Operation mode 1 DDC: DDC mode
Measurement input
X1
“C” , “A” , or
[DDC] is displayed –
in cascade control. Setpoint (SV1)
In backup mode
condition, [BUA] or
[BUM] is displayed. Control element
CNT1
(A)/(BUA)
(M)/(BUM) (C)
Communication
parameter MV1
Y1
Manipulated output RS-485

communication
0121E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-19
For use of the backup mode
Parameter: BMOD1
If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level

(BUM) (BUA) computer is lost during the period set by
M A YS1000's communication watchdog timer, the
MAN AUT from it and automatically changes the operation
mode.
Communication Communication changes to (BUM) or (BUA). If communication
failed recovered recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (DDC).
Cascade setting automatic control Automatic control
DDC
C
(C) A AUT
(CMP) (A) AUT
(DDC) C A
DDC
M M
A : Pressing the “A” mode key

Manual MAN AUT
control
DDC A M : Pressing the “M” mode key
C (M) MAN
M AUT, MAN, DDC:

MAN Sends a communication commands
(YS protocol)
0122E.ai
Communication
1-20 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Display Status of the Instrument's Front Panel in Each Operation Mode 1

Instrument's
Operation Mode Front Panel
Control Function
Lamps
Manual control (M) “M” lamp lights. No display
Automatic control (A) “A” lamp lights. No display
Cascade setting automatic control (C) (CMP) (DDC) “C” lamp lights [DDC] is displayed.
“C” lamp lights
Automatic operation backup status due to communication failure by the
and the “A” lamp [BUA] is displayed.
high-level computer (BUA)
blinks.
“C” lamp lights
Manual operation backup status due to communication failure by the high-
and the “M” lamp [BUM] is displayed.
level computer (BUM)
blinks.
Manipulated Output
Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1) Control Status
Variable (MV1)
Manual control (M) Manual
Automatic control (A) Automatic
Cascade setting automatic control (C) (CMP) Set using a key or through Set through communication
Cascade
(DDC) communication (*1) (*2)
Automatic operation backup status due to
communication failure by the high-level computer Automatic
(BUA)
Manual operation backup status due to
communication failure by the high-level computer Manual
(BUM)
Manual.

transition is held.
The setpoint
Output operation from the high-level computer
(M) or (BUM) → (C) (CMP) (DDC) immediately before
Switching from (M) to (C) (CMP) (DDC) is impossible.
transition is held.
(Switch once from (M) to (A) and then switch from (A)
to (C) (CMP) (DDC)).
The setpoint Switching is made bumplessly with a manipulated
(M) or (BUM) → (A) immediately before output variable immediately before transition used as
transition is held. an initial value to perform automatic control.
The setpoint The manipulated output variable immediately before
(A) or (BUA) → (C) (CMP) (DDC) immediately before transition is held.
transition is held. Output operation from the high-level computer
The setpoint
(A) or (BUA) → (M) immediately before
transition is held.
The setpoint
Switching is made bumplessly to perform automatic
(C) (CMP) (DDC) → (A) or (BUA) immediately before
control.
transition is held.
The setpoint
(C) (CMP) (DDC) → (M) or (BUM) immediately before
transition is held.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-21
Intentionally blank
1-22 IM 01B08B02-02EN
1.1.2 Control in the Cascade Mode (CTL = CAS) 1

In the cascade mode, two loops are connected in series (cascade) to conduct cascade
control.
Control Function
When the cascade mode is selected, the functions are configured as shown in the figure
below. Changing parameters (in blue bold characters) shown in the figure enables the
required functions to be configured.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-23
1-24
DI7
(*1)
(DI7F = Function not set) For YS1500-0/YS1700-0, output tracking input is
DI8 made from analog input (X4).
(DI9F = Function not set) DI1 Feedforward input/output (*1)
DI10 (Parameter DI1F : Cascade setting input Measurement input 1 Measurement input 2 tracking input Output tracking input
(DI10F = Function not set) Function not set) X2 X1 X3 X4 X6
ON ON ON Input filter Input filter

CSR1 PSR1 PSR2
FLG TLG
Square root extraction Square root extraction Square root extraction OFF FIN
and low cutoff adjustable OFF and low cutoff adjustable OFF and low cutoff adjustable
CLC1 PLC1 PLC2 ON
FSW
Gain and bias OFF

FGN (FIN+FBI) +FBO
Input filter
CLG1 ON ON
CIN1 FX1 FX2
ON 10-segment line OFF 10-segment line OFF

CSW1 conversion conversion OFF FON
101 to 111 201 to 211
Ratio and bias
OFF ON
CGN1 (CIN1+CBI1)+
CBO1
SV1 PV1 Input filter Input filter
display display PLG1 PLG2
SV key
(CMOD1=CAS)
LOOP 1 Display LOOP 1 Display
“A” mode key “C” mode key Process variable alarms
PH1,PL1,HH1,LL1,
VL1
P
F PV1
SV1
Parameter –
P FKEY=STC Deviation alarm
+
PF key operation DL1
Closed Control elements1

STC start (Note 1) CNT1,ALG1
DInF=E-STC Self-tuning
STC
Open
FF1
+
SV key
Limiters
IM 01B08B02-02EN
MH1,ML1
Closed
Open DIn=CLOSE
DIn=OPEN
IM 01B08B02-02EN
Internal cascade O/C Process variable alarms
switching (Note 1) PH2,PL2,HH2,LL2,
DInF=E-O/C VL2
PV2
SV2
Output preset MV –
and MAN (Note 1) Deviation alarm
+
DInF=TR-MPMV DL2
Switching by pressing
“C” (Note 1)
DInF=TR-CAS Control element 2
Switching by pressing CNT2,ALG2
“A” (Note 1)
DInF=TR-AUT
Switching by pressing DI1=CLOSE TRK1
“M” (Note 1)
DInF=TR-MAN DI1=OPEN
Output tracking (Note 1)

DInF=E-TRK Preset MV
DI1=CLOSE PMV1
Preset MV switching (Note 1) DI1=OPEN

DInF=E-PMV
DInF,DIn Output limiters

LCD MV key
(n=1, 7, 8, 9, 10) backlight MH2,ML2
< >
DInF=LCD-OFF
“M” mode key on LOOP 1
or LOOP 2 Display
Note 1: One of them can be selected.

enables multiple contacts to be used.
MV
display
*1: Expandable I/O terminal of YS1700
basic type (with expandable I/O)

SV output PV output MV output 2 MV output 1 C, A/M status C/A, M status O/C status Loop 2 alarm Loop 1 alarm (DO7F = Function not set)
(1–5 V) (1–5 V) (1–5 V) (4–20 mA) output output output output output DO8
Y3S = SV1) Y4S = PV1) Y2S = MV1) DO5F = DO4F = CAS) DO3F = O/C) DO2F = DO1F = DO9
(*1) CASAUT) 2-ALM) 1-ALM) (DO9F = Function not set)
DO10
(*1)
1-25
0123E.ai
Cascade Mode Function Block Diagram (for YS1700)

1
Control Function
n Cascade Control Function
Control elements
Control type: Standard PID control and sample-and-hold PI control
Control operation formulas: The formula can be selected from the following for loops 1
and 2.

10-segment line 2.1.3, 10-segment Linearizer Function
Other functions
Manual
1-26 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Control Function
Setting Display
Engineering Display Operation Display > +SHIFT
Display) > SHIFT
+ keys (to the Engineering Menu Display)
0123-01E.ai
Setting Details
To perform automatic control/manual control only, set CMOD1 = − (no setting).
Operations described in “(1) Performing control using YS1000 only” apply.

−: No setting
CMOD1 C-mode 1 CAS: Analog cascade setting mode −
Description
The loop 1's operation mode can be switched by pressing the “A” or “M” mode key on the
instrument's front panel while the LOOP 1 Display is shown.
Loop 1 automatic control (A) if the “A” mode key is pressed

Loop 1 manual control (M) or loop 2 manual control (M) (CLOSE) if the “M” mode key
is pressed
The loop 2's operation mode can be switched among the following three types by
pressing the “C,” “A,” or “M” mode key on the instrument's front panel while the LOOP 2
Display is shown.
Loop 2 automatic control (A) (OPEN) if the “A” mode key is pressed
Loop 1 manual control (M) or loop 2 manual control (M) (OPEN) if the “M” mode key is
pressed
Loop 2 cascade control (CLOSE) if the “C” mode key is pressed
communication, or using user programs in addition to the keys on the instrument's front
panel.
Manual.
► For switching using user programs: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-27
What are “OPEN” and “CLOSE”

CLOSE: Condition in which loop 1's output variable is treated as the setpoint (SV2) of
loop 2. It is the condition in which the (internal) cascade is closed.
OPEN: Condition in which loop 2's setpoint (SV2) is set using a key or through
communication. It is the condition in which the (internal) cascade is open.
Meaning of Symbols
Symbol Meaning
(OPEN) (Internal) Cascade open (OPEN) condition
(CLOSE) (Internal) Cascade closed (CLOSE) condition
1-28 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(1) Performing control using YS1000 only 1
Only internally cascaded automatic control (A) or manual control (M) is available. For the loop 1,
operation does not change even if the “C” mode key on the instrument's front panel is pressed.
Control Function
For the loop 2, the “C,” “A,” and “M” mode keys on the instrument's front panel enable
switching between open/closed, automatic, and manual control.

Measurement Measurement
input 1 input 2
X1 X3
LOOP 1 Display
[CLOSE] is displayed if (A1)

loop 2 is in cascade
control. (M1)
[OPEN] is displayed if
–
loop 2 is in automatic Setpoint (SV1)
control.
[OPEN] is displayed if
manual control is
Control element 1
selected in loop 2.
CNT1
[CLOSE] is displayed if
manual control is
selected in loop 1.

(C2)
(CLOSE) Setpoint (SV2)
LOOP 2 Display –
(A2)
(OPEN)
(C2)
(A2) Control element 2
(M2) CNT2
Same display as
that of loop 1
(M1)/(M2) (A1)/(A2)/(C2)
Manipulated output variable (MV)
Y1
Manipulated output
0124E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-29
Loop 1
key lamp
Loop 2
(C) (A) (M)
key lamp
AUT(LS1)
A C (LS1)*1
1 2
CAS(LS2)
(C) A1-C2
M
2 MAN(LS2)
CLOSE (CLOSE)
M
1
A
2
AUT(LS2)
CAS(LS2)
C
2
(A) A1-A2
OPEN
(OPEN) A
1
A
2
M
1
M
2
AUT(LS1)
AUT(LS2)
MAN(LS1) (LS1)*1
MAN(LS2)
AUT(LS1)
(LS1)*1
CAS(LS2) A
1
MAN(LS1)
C M
(M)
2 1
M1-M2
CLOSE
(CLOSE)
A
AUT(LS2) 2
M
2
MAN(LS2)
AUT(LS1)
A A
AUT(LS2) 1 2
M1-M2
(M) (OPEN)
OPEN
C C M M
1 2 1 2
(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)
CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)
* The heavy lines indicate that the OPEN/CLOSE status has changed. * Operation does not change even if the “C” mode key
*1: Transmission of “CAS,” “DDC,” or “SPC” to the LS1 register using on the LOOP 1 Display is pressed.
a communication command is invalid.
C2: (Internal) Cascade control, An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control
A1-A2 (n: “1” denotes loop 1, while “2” means loop 2.)
M
1 : Press this key (the number
(CLOSE) CLOSE/OPEN: Cascade closed/cascade open represents the loop concerned).
It is displayed on the control status display section. MAN (LS1): Sends a communication command.
0125E.ai
Communication
1-30 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Instrument's Front Panel
Operation Mode Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1 and 2 or
Lamps
METER 1 and 2 Displays
Control Function
Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 Loop 2
[OPEN] is displayed (if manual control is selected in loop 2)
Manual control Manual control
“M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. [CLOSE] is displayed (in A1-C2 mode, if manual control is
(M1) (M2)
selected in loop 1)
(Internal) Cascade
“A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [CLOSE] is displayed.
Automatic control (C2)
control (A1) Automatic control
“A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [OPEN] is displayed.
(A2)
Setpoints and Control Status in Each Operation Mode

Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1, SV2)
Control Status
Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 (SV1) Loop 2 (SV2)
Set using a key or through communication (*2)
Manual
Set using a key or (if internal cascade is in open status)
through communication Loop 2's process variable is treated as a setpoint
(M1) (M2)
(*1) (SV2). Manual
(if internal cascade is in close status)
(Internal) Cascade Loop 1's output variable is treated as a setpoint (Internal)
control (C2) Set using a key or (SV2). Cascade
Automatic
through communication
control (A1) Automatic control (*1)
Set using a key or through communication (*2) Automatic
(A2)
Manual.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-31
Setting Display
SHIFT
Display) > SHIFT
0126E.ai
Setting Details
To perform automatic control, manual control, or cascade setting automatic control, set
CMOD1 = CAS or CMP.
Any of operations (1) to (3) is performed according to the setting.
(1) Operation is controlled based on an external setpoint from analog input.
(2) Operation is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication, or
backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication.
communication, or backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication.

−: No setting
CMOD1 C-mode 1 CAS: Analog cascade setting mode −
Backup mode BUA: Automatic operation backup mode
BMOD1 BUM
1 BUM: Manual operation backup mode
Description
The loop 1's operation mode can be switched among the following three types by
pressing the “C,” “A,” or “M” mode key on the instrument's front panel while the LOOP 1
Display is shown.
Loop 1 automatic control (A) if the “A” mode key is pressed.

Loop 1 manual control or loop 2 manual control (M) (CLOSE) if the “M” mode key is
pressed.
Loop 1 cascade setting automatic control (C) if the “C” mode key is pressed.
The loop 2's operation mode can be similarly switched among the following three types
by pressing the “C,” “A,” or “M” mode key on the instrument's front panel while the LOOP
2 Display is shown.
Loop 2 automatic control (A) (OPEN) if the “A” mode key is pressed.
Loop 1 manual control or loop 2 manual control (M) (OPEN) if the “M” mode key is
pressed.
Loop 2 cascade control (CLOSE) if the “C” mode key is pressed.
1-32 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Switching to each operation mode can be achieved based on digital input (DI), through 1
panel.
Control Function
Manual.
What are “OPEN” and “CLOSE”

CLOSE: Condition in which the loop 1's output variable is treated as the setpoint (SV2) of
loop 2. It is the condition in which the (internal) cascade is closed.
OPEN: Condition in which the loop 2's setpoint (SV2) is set using a key or through
communication. It is the condition in which the (internal) cascade is open.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-33
Cascade setting automatic control (C mode)

Cascade setting automatic control (C) is a mode in which control is performed based on
an external setpoint (SV) (through communication or from analog input).
Cascade setting automatic control (C), requiring the use of the “C” mode key, performs
different operations depending on the setting of the C-mode 1 (CMOD1) parameter.
There is an analog cascade setting mode (CAS) and a computer cascade setting mode
(CMP) in cascade setting automatic control (C). Moreover, the computer cascade setting
Cascade Mode Communication

(Parameter CMOD1) Mode
Cascade setting automatic control SPC mode (*)

(C) DDC mode (*)
Write “SPC” to LS1 to use cascade setting automatic control in the SPC mode or “DDC” to
Backup mode
YS1000's communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has
failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes
the operation mode. This operating status is called “backup mode” and there are the
following two types of backup mode. A backup mode is set using the backup mode 1
(BMOD1) engineering parameter.

Operation transitions from cascade setting automatic control (C) to the automatic
operation backup mode (BUA) equivalent to automatic control (A). In this mode, the

Operation transitions from cascade setting automatic control (C) to manual operation
backup mode (BUM) equivalent to manual control (M). In this mode, the “C” lamp is
lit and the “M” lamp blinks on the instrument's front panel. If the high-level computer
recovers communication in this condition, operation changes to cascade setting
automatic control (C).
1-34 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Meaning of Symbols 1
Symbol Meaning
Control Function
(OPEN) (Internal) Cascade open status
(CLOSE) (Internal) Cascade closed status
Cascade setting automatic control (C) – analog cascade setting mode (CAS)
(C) (CAS)
status
Cascade setting automatic control (C) – computer cascade setting mode (CMP) –
(C) (CMP) (SPC)
cascade backup mode (SPC) status based on an external setpoint
(C) (CMP) (DDC) – cascade backup mode (DDC) status based on external manipulated output
variable
Manual operation backup status due to a communication failure by the high-level
computer
(BUM)
(Same operation as manual control is performed and control automatically returns
to cascade setting automatic control if communication failure is cleared.)
Automatic operation backup status due to a communication failure by the high-
level computer
(BUA)
(Same operation as automatic control is performed and control automatically
returns to cascade setting automatic control if communication failure is cleared.)
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-35
(1) Performing control based on an external setpoint from analog input
YS1000 accepts an external setpoint from the analog input (terminal X2) to perform
cascade control.

Cascade Measurement Measurement

setting input input 1 input 2
X2 X1 X3
[CAS] is displayed LOOP 1 Display

in cascade control.
[CLOSE] is (C1)
displayed if loop 2
is in cascade control. (A1)
[OPEN] is displayed (C1)
(M1)
if loop 2 is in –
automatic control. Setpoint (SV1)
[OPEN] is displayed (A1)/(M1)
if manual control is
selected in loop 2. Control element 1
[CLOSE] is CNT1
displayed if manual
control is selected
in loop 1.
An analog Process variable (PV2)

cascade setting (C2)
value is displayed. (CLOSE) Setpoint (SV2)
LOOP 2 Display –
(C2)
(OPEN)
h (C2)
(M2) CNT2
Same display
as that of loop 1
(M1)/(M2) (A1)/(A2)/(C1)/(C2)
Y1
Manipulated output
0127E.ai
1-36 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Loop 1
key lamp
1
Loop 2
(C) (A) (M)
key lamp
Control Function
MAN(LS2) MAN(LS1)
AUT(LS1)
M M A C
2 1 1 2 CAS(LS2)
CAS(LS1) *1
CAS(LS2)
(C) C
1 C1-C2
A
1 AUT(LS1)
A1-C2
M
2 MAN(LS2)
CLOSE C
2 (CLOSE) (CLOSE) M
C
CAS(LS1) *1 1 1 MAN(LS1)
A A
2 2
AUT(LS2) AUT(LS2)
CAS(LS2) CAS(LS2)
C C
2 2
CAS(LS1) *1
AUT(LS2)
(A)
A
C A 1 AUT(LS1)
1 2
C1-A2 A1-A2
OPEN (OPEN) A
(OPEN) C 1
CAS(LS1) *1 1 A
2
M M M M
1 2 1 2 AUT(LS1)
AUT(LS2)
MAN(LS1) MAN(LS1)
MAN(LS2) MAN(LS2)
CAS(LS1) *1 AUT(LS1)
CAS(LS2) A
1
MAN(LS1)
C M
(M)
1 1
C
2 M1-M2
CLOSE (CLOSE)
A
AUT(LS2) 2
M
2
MAN(LS2)
AUT(LS1)
A A
AUT(LS2) 1 2
M1-M2
(M) (OPEN)
OPEN
C C M M
1 2 1 2
CAS(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)
CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)
* Heavy lines indicate that the OPEN/CLOSE status has been changed.
*1: Transmission of “DDC” or “SPC” to the LS1 register using a communication command is invalid.
C1: Cascade setting automatic control, C2: (Internal) Cascade control

M
A1-A2 An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control 1 : Press this key (the number
(n: “1” denotes loop 1, while “2” means loop 2.) represents the loop concerned).
(CLOSE)
CLOSE/OPEN: Cascade closed/cascade open
MAN (LS1): Sends a communication command.
It is displayed on the control status display section.
0128E.ai
Communication
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-37

Lamps
[OPEN] is displayed (if manual control is selected in loop 2)
Manual control Manual control (*1)
“M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights.
(M1) (M2) [CLOSE] is displayed (in C1-C2 mode or A1-C2 mode, if
manual control is selected in loop 1) (*1)
(Internal)
Cascade control “A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [CLOSE] is displayed. (*1)
Automatic (C2)
control (A1)
Automatic control
“A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [OPEN] is displayed. (*1)
(A2)
(Internal)
Cascade Cascade control “C” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [CAS] and [CLOSE] are displayed. (*1)
setting (C2)
automatic
control (C1) Automatic control
“C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [CAS] and [OPEN] is displayed. (*1)
(A2)

Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1, SV2) Control
Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 (SV1) Loop 2 (SV2) Status
Manual
(if internal cascade is in open status)
Manual Manual control Set using a key or through
control (M1) (M2) communication (*1) Loop 2's process variable is treated as setpoint
(SV2). Manual
(Internal)
(Internal)
Cascade control Loop 1's output variable is treated as setpoint (SV2).
Automatic Set using a key or through Cascade
(C2)
control (A1) communication (*1)
Automatic control
(A2)
(Internal)
Cascade External setpoint from (Internal)
Cascade control Loop 1's output variable is treated as setpoint (SV2).
setting analog input (terminal X2) Cascade
(C2)
automatic
control (C1) Automatic control External setpoint from
(A2) analog input (terminal X2)
Manual.
1-38 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Control Function
Intentionally blank
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-39
(2) Performing control based on an external setpoint through communication/backup operation

if the high-level computer fails in communication
YS1000 accepts the loop 1's external setpoint through communication to perform
cascade control. If the high-level computer fails in communication, the YS1000 backs
up operation. If the computer recovers communication, control returns to the original
condition.

BMOD1 Backup mode 1

1-40 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Measurement
input 1
Measurement
input 2
1
RS-485 communication X1 X3
Control Function
Communication
parameter SV1
LOOP 1 Display
[SPC] is displayed (C1)

in cascade control.
(A1)
[CLOSE] is displayed (M1) (C1)
if loop 2 is in cascade
control. –
[OPEN] is displayed if Setpoint (SV1)
loop 2 is in automatic
control. (A1)/(C1)
[OPEN] is displayed if (BUA)/(C1)(BUM) Control element 1
manual control is CNT1
selected in loop 2.
[CLOSE] is displayed
selected in loop 1.
(C2)
LOOP 2 Display –
(A2)
(OPEN)
m 3/ h (C2)
1 0 0. 0 0

(M2) CNT2
Same display as
that of loop 1
(M1)/(M2)/ (A1)/(A2)/(C1)/
(C1)(BUM) (C2)/(C1)(BUA)
Y1
Manipulated output
0129E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-41
1-42
Setpoint
Loop 2 (BUA) (BUM)
key lamp
Switching from the BUA or BUM mode
to another mode can be accomplished
If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level using a key or through communication,
(C) C1(BUA)-C2 C1(BUM)-C2 but the reverse is not possible.
computer is lost during the period set by CLOSE (CLOSE) (CLOSE)
YS1000’s communication watchdog timer, the
from it and automatically changes the operation
mode. Communication recovered
Communication failed
changes to (BUM) or (BUA). If communication
recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (SPC).
For use in the backup mode Loop 1 key

lamp
Loop 2 (C) (A) (M)
Setpoint key lamp
Loop 2 (BUA) MAN(LS2)
key lamp SPC(LS1)
*1 M M A C AUT(LS1)
2 1 1 2 CAS(LS2)
CAS(LS2)
C
1 A M MAN(LS2)
(C) C 1 AUT(LS1) 2
2 C1(SPC)-C2 A1-C2
CLOSE (CLOSE) SPC(LS1) C (CLOSE) M
(A) 1 1 MAN(LS1)
C1(BUA)-A2 *1
OPEN (OPEN)
Communication A A
2 2
recovered
AUT(LS2) AUT(LS2)
CAS(LS2) CAS(LS2)
SPC(LS1) C *Not available in C
Setpoint
*1 2 2
the BUM mode.
Loop 2 (BUM) AUT(LS2)
key lamp C A A AUT(LS1)
1 2 1
(A) C1(SPC)-A2 A1-A2 A
OPEN (OPEN) SPC(LS1) C (OPEN) 1
1 A
*1 2
M M M M
1 2 1 2
AUT(LS1)
AUT(LS2)
MAN(LS1) MAN(LS1)
(A) C1(BUM)-A2
MAN(LS2) MAN(LS2)
OPEN (OPEN)
IM 01B08B02-02EN
Communication
failed
Switching from the BUA or BUM mode to
another mode can be made using a key or SPC(LS1)
through communication, but the reverse is *1 AUT(LS1)
CAS(LS2) A
not possible. In the BUM mode, operation 1
MAN(LS1)
does not change even if the “C” mode key C M
IM 01B08B02-02EN
1 1
is pressed on loop 2’s Operation Display. C
2
(M) M1-M2
CLOSE A (CLOSE)
AUT(LS2) 2
M
2
MAN(LS2)
AUT(LS1)
A A
AUT(LS2) 1 2
(M) M1-M2
(OPEN)
OPEN
C C M M
1 2 1 2
SPC(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)
CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)
*1: Transmission of “CAS” to the LS1 register using a communication command is invalid.
A1-A2 An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control
(CLOSE) (n: “1” denotes loop 1, while “2” means loop 2.)
M
1: Press this key (the number represents the loop concerned).
0130E.ai
Status Transition Diagram When the Operation Mode is Changed Using Keys or through Communication
1-43
Control Function

Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel Lamps Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1 and 2
Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 Loop 2 or METER 1 and 2 Displays
[OPEN] is displayed (if manual control is selected in
Manual control loop 2)
Manual control (M1) “M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights.
(M2) [CLOSE] is displayed (in C1(SPC)-C2 mode or A1-C2
mode, if manual control is selected in loop 1)
(Internal)
Cascade control “A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [CLOSE] is displayed.
(A1)
Automatic control
(A2)
(Internal)
Cascade setting Cascade control “C” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [SPC] and [CLOSE] are displayed.
automatic control (C2)
(C1) (SPC) Automatic control
“C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SPC] and [OPEN] are displayed.
(A2)
(Internal) “C” lamp lights
Cascade control and “A” lamp “C” lamp lights. [BUA] and [CLOSE] are displayed.
Cascade setting (C2) blinks.
automatic control
(C1) (BUA) “C” lamp lights
Automatic control
and “A” lamp “A” lamp lights. [BUA] and [OPEN] are displayed.
(A2)
blinks.
(Internal) “C” lamp lights “C” lamp lights
Cascade control and “M” lamp and “M” lamp [BUM] and [CLOSE] are displayed.
Cascade setting (C2) blinks. blinks.
automatic control
(C1) (BUM) “C” lamp lights “A” lamp lights
Automatic control
and “M” lamp and “M” lamp [BUM] and [OPEN] are displayed.
(A2)
blinks. blinks.

Operation Mode Setpoint (SV1, SV2) Control
Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 (SV1) Loop 1 (SV1) Status
Set using a key or through communication (*2) (if
Set using a Manual
Manual control internal cascade is in open status)
Manual control (M2) key or through
(M1) Loop 2's process variable is treated as setpoint
communication (*1) Manual
(SV2). (if internal cascade is in close status)
(Internal) Cascade Set using a (Internal)
Automatic Loop 1's output variable is treated as setpoint (SV2).
control (C2) key or through Cascade
control (A1)
Automatic control (A2) communication (*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2) Automatic
Cascade setting (Internal) Cascade (Internal)
Loop 1's output variable is treated as setpoint (SV2).
automatic control (C2) Set through Cascade
control communication (*1)
(C1) (SPC) Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through communication (*2) Automatic
Cascade setting (Internal) Cascade (Internal)

Set using a Loop 1's output variable is treated as setpoint (SV2).
automatic control (C2) Cascade
key or through
control
Automatic control (A2) communication (*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2) Automatic
(C1) (BUA)
Cascade setting (Internal) Cascade Loop 2's process variable is treated as setpoint
Set using a Manual
automatic control (C2) (SV2).
key or through
control
Automatic control (A2) communication (*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2) Manual
(C1) (BUM)
Manual.
1-44 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Control Function
Intentionally blank
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-45
(3) Performing control based on an external manipulated output variable through communication,
or backup operation if the high-level computer fails in communication
YS1000 accepts a manipulated output variable through communication to perform

cascade control. If the high-level computer fails in communication, the YS1000 backs
condition.

BMOD1 Backup mode 1

1-46 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Measurement
input 1
Measurement
input 2
1
X1 X3
Control Function
LOOP 1 Display
(C1)
[DDC] is displayed
in cascade control. (A1)
[CLOSE] is (M1)
displayed if loop 2 –
is in cascade control. Setpoint (SV1)
[OPEN] is displayed
if loop 2 is in
automatic control. Control element 1
[OPEN] is displayed CNT1
selected in loop 2.
[CLOSE] is
displayed if manual
control is selected Process variable (PV2)
in loop 1. (C2)
LOOP 2 Display –
(A2)
(OPEN)
(C2)
(M2) CNT2
Same display
as that of loop 1
(M1)/(M2)/ (A1)/(A2)/
(C1)(BUM) (C1)(BUA)/(C2)
(C1)(DDC)

Communication
parameter MV1
Y1
Manipulated output RS-485

communication
0131E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-47
1-48
Setpoint
Loop 2 (BUA) (BUM)
key lamp

to another mode can be made using a
(C) C1(BUA)-C2 C1(BUM)-C2 key or through communication, but the
If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level (CLOSE) (CLOSE)
CLS reverse is not possible.
computer is lost during the period set by
recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (DDC).

lamp
Loop 2 (C) (A) (M)
Setpoint key lamp
key lamp DDC(LS1)
*1 M M A C AUT(LS1)
2 1 1 2
CAS(LS2) CAS(LS2)
C M
1 A
1 AUT(LS1) 2 MAN(LS2)
(C) C
2 C1(DDC)-C2 A1-C2
CLOSE (CLOSE) DDC(LS1) C (CLOSE) M
(A) 1 1 MAN(LS1)
C1(BUA)-A2 *1
OPEN (OPEN) A A
Communication 2 2
recovered AUT(LS2) AUT(LS2)
CAS(LS2) CAS(LS2)
DDC(LS1) C *Not available in C
Setpoint
*1 2 2
the BUM mode.
key lamp C A A
1 2 1 AUT(LS1)
(A) C1(DDC)-A2 A1-A2 A
OPEN (OPEN) DDC(LS1) C (OPEN) 1
1 A
*1 2
M M M M AUT(LS1)
1 2 1 2
AUT(LS2) DDC(LS1)
(A) C1(BUM)-A2 MAN(LS1) MAN(LS1)
*1
OPEN (OPEN) MAN(LS2) MAN(LS2)
C
1
IM 01B08B02-02EN
Communication
failed
another mode can be made using a key or AUT(LS1)
through communication, but the reverse is CAS(LS2) A
1
not possible. In the BUM mode, operation MAN(LS1)
M
1
IM 01B08B02-02EN
does not change even if the “C” mode key
C
2
is pressed on loop 2’s Operation Display. (M) M1-M2
CLOSE A (CLOSE)
AUT(LS2) 2
M
2
MAN(LS2)
AUT(LS1)
A A
AUT(LS2) 1 2
(M) M1-M2
OPEN (OPEN)
C
1
DDC(LS1)
*1 C M M
2 1 2
MAN(LS1)
CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)
*1: Transmission of “CAS” to the LS1 register using a communication command is invalid.
A1-A2 An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control
(CLOSE) (n: “1” denotes loop 1, while “2” means loop 2.)
M
1: Press this key (the number represents the loop concerned).
0132E.ai
1-49
Control Function

Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel Lamps Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1 and 2
[OPEN] is displayed (if manual control is selected in
Manual control Manual control loop 2)
(M1) (M2) [CLOSE] is displayed (in C1(DDC)-C2 mode or A1-C2
mode, if manual control is selected in loop 1)
(Internal)
Cascade control “A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [CLOSE] is displayed.
(A1)
Automatic control
(A2)
(Internal)
Cascade setting Cascade control “C” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [DDC] and [CLOSE] are displayed.
(C1) (DDC) Automatic control
“C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [DDC] and [OPEN] are displayed.
(A2)
(Internal) “C” lamp lights
Cascade control and “A” lamp “C” lamp lights. [BUA] and [CLOSE] are displayed.
Cascade setting (C2) blinks.
automatic control
Automatic control
and “A” lamp “A” lamp lights. [BUA] and [OPEN] are displayed.
(A2)
blinks.
(Internal) “C” lamp lights “C” lamp lights
Cascade control and “M” lamp and “M” lamp [BUM] and [CLOSE] are displayed.
automatic control
Automatic control
and “M” lamp and “M” lamp [BUM] and [OPEN] are displayed.
(A2)
blinks. blinks.

Control Status
Manual
Set using a (if internal cascade is in open status)
key or through Loop 2's process variable is treated as
(M1) (M2)
communication (*1) setpoint (SV2). Manual
(Internal) Cascade Loop 1's output variable is treated as setpoint
Set using a (Internal) Cascade
Automatic control (C2) (SV2).
key or through
control (A1) Automatic control communication (*1)
(A2)
Cascade setting (Internal) Cascade Loop 1's output variable is treated as setpoint Output operation via
automatic control (C2) Set through (SV2). communication
control Automatic control communication (*1) Output operation via
(C1) (DDC) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
(A2) communication
Cascade setting (Internal) Cascade Loop 1's output variable is treated as setpoint
Set using a (Internal) Cascade
automatic control (C2) (SV2).
key or through
control Automatic control communication (*1)
(C1) (BUA) Set using a key or through communication (*2) Automatic
(A2)
Cascade setting (Internal) Cascade Loop 2's process variable is treated as
Set using a Manual
automatic control (C2) setpoint (SV2).
key or through
control Automatic control communication (*1)
(C1) (BUM) Set using a key or through communication (*2) Manual
(A2)
Manual.
1-50 IM 01B08B02-02EN
1.1.3 Control in the Selector Mode (CTL = SELECT) 1

The selector mode consists of the operation results obtained by two (loop 1 and loop 2)
control operation formulas and autoselector (ATSEL).
Control Function
The autoselector can be selected using auto high selector (HIGH) or auto low selector
(LOW) or by manual operation.
When the selector mode is selected, the functions are configured as shown in the figure
below. Changing parameters (in blue bold characters) shown in the figure enables the
required functions to be configured.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-51
DI7
1-52
For YS1500-0/YS1700-0, output tracking input is
(DI7F = Function not set) (*1) made from analog input 4(X4).
DI8
(DI9F = Function not set) DI1 Cascade setting input 2/ (*1)
DI10 (Parameter DI1F : Cascade setting input 1 Measurement input 1 output tracking input Measurement input 2 Output tracking input
(DI10F = Function not set) Function not set) X2 X1 X4 X3 X6
ON ON ON ON
CSR1 PSR1 CSR2 PSR2
Square root extraction OFF Square root extraction OFF Square root extraction OFF Square root extraction OFF
and low cutoff adjustable and low cutoff adjustable and low cutoff adjustable and low cutoff adjustable
CLC1 PLC1 CLC2 PLC2
Input filter Input filter

CLG1 ON CLG2 ON
FX1 FX2
CIN1 CIN2
ON 10-segment line OFF ON 10-segment line OFF
CSW1 conversion CSW2 conversion
101 to 111 201 to 211
Ratio and bias OFF Ratio and bias OFF
CGN1(CIN1+CBI1)+ CGN2(CIN2+CBI2)+
CBO1 CBO2
SV1 PV1 Input filter SV key SV2 PV2 Input filter Input filter
SV key display display display display PLG2
PLG1 TLG
(CMOD1=CAS)
LOOP 1 Display
LOOP 1 Display “C” mode key
“A” mode key Process variable alarms
PH1,PL1,HH1,LL1,
VL1
PV1
SV1
–
Deviation alarm
DL1 +
Process variable alarms

PH2,PL2,HH2,LL2,
L(OPEN) R(CLOSE) VL2
Selector’s secondary SV PV2

L/R switching (Note 1) SV2
–
DInF=E-L/R
Deviation alarm +
Control DL2
elements 1
Self- CNT1,ALG1
tuning
STC Control element 2
CNT1,ALG1
IM 01B08B02-02EN
�P
F Parameter
PFKEY=STC
IM 01B08B02-02EN
STC start (Note 1) Autoselector
DInF=E-STC ATSEL
Selector selection DI1=CLOSE→AUT
(Note 1)
DInF=E-SEL DI1=OPEN→1
1 2
Switching by pressing “C” (Note 1) SSW
DInF=TR-CAS
Switching by pressing “A” (Note 1) Selector (Note 1)
DInF=TR-AUT DInF=E-LPSEL DI1=CLOSE
Switching by pressing “M” (Note 1) DI open: Output the computation result of Loop 2
DInF=TR-MAN DI1=OPEN TRK1
DI close: Output the computation result of Loop 1
Tracking switching (Note 1)

DInF=E-TRK
Preset MV
PMV1
Output preset MV and
MAN (Note 1)
DInF=TR-MPMV DI1=CLOSE
DI1=OPEN
Preset MV switching (Note 1)
DInF=E-PMV
Output limiters MV key

DInF, DIn LCD MH1,ML1
(n=1, 7, 8, 9, 10) backlight
DInF=LCD-OFF
“M” mode key on LOOP 1 or
LOOP 2 Display
Note 1: One of them can be selected.

enables multiple contacts to be used.
*1: Expandable I/O terminal of YS1700 MV

basic type (with expandable I/O) display

SV output PV output MV output 2 MV output 1 C, A/M status C/A, M status R/L status Loop 2 alarm Loop 1 alarm (DO7F = Function not set)
(1–5 V) (1–5 V) (1–5 V) (4–20 mA) output output output output output DO8
Y3S = SV1) Y4S = PV1) Y2S = MV1) DO5F = DO4F = CAS) DO3F = L/R) DO2F = DO1F = DO9
(*1) CASAUT) 2-ALM) 1-ALM) (DO9F = Function not set)
DO10
(*1)
0133E.ai
Selector Mode Function Block Diagram (for YS1700)
1-53
Control Function
n Selector Control Function
Control elements
Control type: Standard PID control
Control operation formulas: The formula can be selected from the following for loops 1
and 2:
Selector function: can be selected from autoselector, high selector, and low selector.
Manual selection control: The set loop's output variable can be output regardless of the
magnitude of the signal.

10-segment line 2.1.3, 10-Segment Linearizer Function
Other functions
Manual
1-54 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Control Function
Setting Display
SHIFT
Display) > +
SHIFT
> [CONFIG1] software key (Configuration Display 1) or
[CONFIG2] software key (Configuration Display 2)
0134E.ai
Tuning Display Operation Display > +

SHIFT
Display) > [PID2] software key (PID Setting Display 2)
0135E.ai
Setting Details
To perform automatic control or manual control only, set CMOD1 = − (no setting) or
CMOD2 = − (no setting). Operations described in “(1) Performing control using YS1000
only” apply.

−: No setting
− (No setting)
−: No setting
Autoselector LOW: Selects a smaller output variable.
ATSEL LOW
selection HIGH: Selects a larger output variable.
AUT: Automatic selection according to selection
Selector of autoselector (ATSEL)
SSW AUT
control switch 1: Selects loop 1 output.
2: Selects loop 2 output.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-55
Description
The operation modes of loops 1 and 2 can be switched by pressing the “A” or “M” mode
key on the instrument's front panel.
(The mode of the displayed loop will be changed.)

panel.
Manual.
Meaning of Symbols
Symbol Meaning
1-56 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(1) Performing control using YS1000 only for both loops 1 and 2 1
Selector control is performed using only YS1000 for both the loops 1 and 2. Operation
Control Function
does not change for either loop even if the “C” mode key on the instrument's front panel
is pressed.

input 1 input 2
X1 X3
LOOP 1 Display
(A1)
[SV2 – LCL] is
displayed. (M1)
–
[SEL1] is displayed Setpoint (SV1)
if loop 1 output is
selected.
[SEL2] is displayed Control element 1
if loop 2 output is CNT1
selected.
Setpoint (SV2)
LOOP 2 Display –
Control element 2
CNT2
(A2)
(M2)
Autoselector selection
ATSEL
Same display as AUT
that of loop 1
1 2
(SSW)
(M1)/(M2) (A1)/(A2)
Y1
Manipulated output
0136E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-57
Loop 1
key lamp
Loop 2
(C) (A) (M)
key lamp
(C)
SV2-RMT
(LS1)*1
(LS2)*2
AUT(LS1)
AUT(LS2)
(A)
A
1
A
A1-A2
SV2-LCL 2 (SV2-LCL)
M M
1 2
MAN(LS1)
MAN(LS2)
(M)
SV2-RMT
AUT(LS1) A A
AUT(LS2) 1 2
M1-M2
(M) (SV2-LCL)
SV2-LCL
M M
1 2
(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)
(LS2)*2 MAN(LS2)
*1: Transmission of “CAS,” “DDC,” or “SPC” to the LS1 register using * Operation does not change even if the “C” mode key
communication commands is invalid. on the LOOP 1 or LOOP 2 Display is pressed.
*2: Transmission of “CAS” to the LS2 register using a communication
command is invalid.
An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control

M
1: Press this key (the number represents
(SV2-LCL) SV2-LCL: Loop 2 is in local. the loop concerned).
SV2-LCL is displayed on the control status display section. MAN (LS1): Sends a communication command.
0137E.ai
Communication
1-58 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel Lamps Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1
Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 Loop 2 and 2 or METER 1 and 2 Displays
Control Function
“M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] is displayed.
(M1) (M2)
Automatic control Automatic control
“A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL], [SEL1], or [SEL2] is displayed.
(A1) (A1)
Setpoints in Each Operation Mode

Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) Set using a key or through Set using a key or through
Automatic control (A1) Automatic control (A2) communication (*1) communication (*2)

Manual.
The following table shows an output variable and control status in each operation mode
according to the settings of the selector selection switch (SSW) tuning parameter and
autoselector selection (ATSEL) engineering parameter.
Output Variables and Control Status in Each Operation Mode
Parameter
Loop 1 (CNT1) Loop 2 (CNT2) Control Status
Setpoint
Operation Operation
SSW ATSEL Output Variable Output Variable Manipulated Output
Mode Mode
MV is operated using keys
Manual control Manual
Follows up MV. Follows up MV. or through communication
(M1) control (M2)
(manual operation).
LOW
Outputs control operation. Outputs control operation.
Automatic Automatic CNT1 or CNT2, whichever
(Loop 1's output = MV + (Loop 2's output = MV +
control (A1) control (A2) is smaller, is selected.
Kp1 × E1 if not selected) Kp2 × E2 if not selected)
AUT
Manual control Manual
Follows up MV. Follows up MV. or through communication
(M1) control (M2)
(manual operation).
HIGH
Outputs control operation. Outputs control operation.
Automatic Automatic CNT1 or CNT2, whichever
control (A1) control (A2) is larger, is selected.
MV is operated using
Manual control keys or through Manual
Follows up MV. Follows up MV.
(M1) communication (*1). control (M2)
(Manual operation)
1 –
CNT1 output is selected
Automatic Outputs control Automatic regardless of the
Follows up MV.
control (A1) operation. control (A2) magnitude of the CNT1
and CNT2 signals.
Manual control Manual keys or through
(M1) control (M2) communication (*2).
(Manual operation)
2 –
CNT2 output is selected
Automatic Automatic Outputs control regardless of the
Follows up MV.
control (A1) control (A2) operation. magnitude of the CNT1
and CNT2 signals.
MV: Manipulated output, Kpn (n = 1, 2): Proportional gain, En (n = 1, 2): Deviation

Manual.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-59
Setting Display
SHIFT
Display) > +
SHIFT
> [CONFIG1] software key (Configuration Display 1) or
[CONFIG2] software key (Configuration Display 2)
0138E.ai
Tuning Display Operation Display > SHIFT

+ keys (to the Tuning Menu
Display) > [PID2] software key (PID Setting Display 2)
0139E.ai
Setting Details
To perform automatic control, manual control, or cascade setting automatic control,
set CMOD1 = CAS or CMP or CMOD2 = CAS or CMP. Any of operations (1) to (7) is
performed according to the setting.
(1) Loop 1 is controlled by YS1000 only, while loop 2 is controlled based on an external
setpoint from analog input.
(2) Loop 1 is controlled based on an external setpoint from analog input, while loop 2 is
controlled by YS1000 only.
(3) Both loops 1 and 2 are controlled based on an external setpoint from analog input.
(4) Loop 1 is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication (backed up if the
high-level computer fails in communication), while loop 2 is controlled by YS1000 only.
(5) Loop 1 is controlled based on an external setpoint through communication (backed
up if the high-level computer fails in communication), while loop 2 is controlled based
on an external setpoint from analog input.
communication (backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication).
1-60 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(7) Operation is controlled based on an external manipulated output variable through 1

communication (backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication) and
controlled based on an external manipulated output variable of loop 2 from analog
Control Function
input.

−: No setting
− (No setting)
−: No setting
Backup BUA: Automatic operation backup mode
BMOD1 BUM
mode 1 BUM: Manual operation backup mode
Autoselector LOW: Selects a smaller output variable.
ATSEL LOW
selection HIGH: Selects a larger output variable.
0 (AUT): Automatic selection according to
Selector
autoselector selection (ATSEL)
SSW control AUT
switch
Description
The operation modes of loops 1 and 2 can be switched among the following three types
by pressing the “C,” “A,” or “M” mode key on the instrument's front panel. (The mode of
the displayed loop will be changed.)

Cascade setting automatic control (C) if the “C” mode key is pressed
panel.
Manual.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-61
Cascade setting automatic control (C mode)

The loop 1 cascade setting automatic control (C) is an operation mode in which control
is performed based on an external setpoint (SV) (through communication or from analog
input).
There is an analog cascade setting mode (CAS) and a computer cascade setting mode
(CMP) in cascade setting automatic control (C). Moreover, the computer cascade setting
The loop 1 cascade setting automatic control (C) is set by the C-mode 1 (CMOD1)
parameter.
Communication
Loop 1 Cascade Mode (Parameter CMOD1)
Mode
Cascade setting automatic SPC mode (*)

control (C) DDC mode (*)
Write “SPC” to LS1 to use cascade setting automatic control in the SPC mode or “DDC” to
The loop 2 cascade setting automatic control (C) is an operation mode in which control
is performed based on an external setpoint (SV) (from analog input). There is an analog
cascade setting mode (CAS) in this cascade setting automatic control (C). The loop 2
cascade setting automatic control (C) is set by the C-mode 2 (CMOD2) parameter.
Setting to the analog cascade setting mode (CAS) enables the use of the loop 2 cascade
Loop 2 Cascade Mode (Parameter CMOD2)

Cascade setting automatic Analog cascade setting mode (CAS)
control (C)
No setting (−)
If an external setpoint (SV) has been set, [SV2-RMT] will be displayed on the control
status display section.
In manual control (M), there are two types of control: a condition in which a setpoint
(SV) can be externally set and a condition in which it can be set using a key or through
communication. The condition YS1000 is in can be identified by [SV2-RMT] displayed on
the control status display section.
In the selector mode, the operation mode of the loop 1 and loop 2 cascade setting
automatic control (C) differs from the parameter (CMOD1/CMOD2) setting.
1-62 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Backup mode 1
Control Function
YS1000's communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has
failed in communication. The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes
the operation mode. This operating status is called “backup mode” and there are the
following two types of backup mode. A backup mode is set using the backup mode 1
(BMOD1) engineering parameter.

Operation transitions from cascade setting automatic control (C) to the automatic
operation backup mode (BUA) equivalent to automatic control (A). In this mode, the

Operation transitions from cascade setting automatic control (C) to manual operation
backup mode (BUM) equivalent to manual control (M). In this mode, the “C” lamp is
lit and the “M” lamp blinks on the instrument's front panel. If the high-level computer
recovers communication in this condition, operation changes to cascade setting
What are “REMOTE” and “LOCAL”

REMORT (RMT): Condition in which the loop 2's setpoint (SV2) is set by the loop 2's
cascade setting input (X4) in the selector mode.
LOCAL (LCL): Condition in which the loop 2's setpoint (SV2) is set by the [ ], [ ]
keys on the instrument's front panel in the selector mode.
Meaning of Symbols
Symbol Meaning
Loop 1's cascade setting automatic control (C) – analog cascade setting mode
(C) (CAS)
(CAS) status
Loop 1's cascade setting automatic control (C) – computer cascade setting
(C) (CMP) (SPC) mode (CMP) – cascade backup mode (SPC) status based on an external
setpoint
Loop 1's cascade setting automatic control (C) – computer cascade setting
(C) (CMP) (DDC) mode (CMP) – cascade backup mode (DDC) status based on external
manipulated output variable
Loop 2's cascade setting automatic control (RMT) or manual control. RMT:
(SV2-RMT)
Remote
(SV2-LCL) Loop 2's automatic control or manual control (LCL). LCL: Local
Manual operation backup status due to a communication failure by the high-
level computer
(BUM) (Same operation as manual control is performed and control automatically
returns to cascade setting automatic control if communication failure is
cleared.)
Automatic operation backup status due to a communication failure by the high-
level computer
(BUA) (Same operation as automatic control is performed and control automatically
returns to cascade setting automatic control if communication failure is
cleared.)
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-63
(1) Controlling loop 1 using YS1000 only and loop 2 based on an external setpoint from analog
input
YS1000 accepts an external setpoint for loop 2 from analog input (terminal X4) to
perform selector control.

1-64 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Loop 2's
Measurement cascade Measurement
1
input 1 setting input input 2
Control Function
X1 X4 X3
LOOP 1 Display
[SV2-RMT] is
displayed if loop
2 is in remote. (A1)
[SV2-LCL] is
displayed if loop (M1)
2 is in local. –
Setpoint (SV1)
[SEL1] is
displayed if
loop 1 output is Control element 1
selected. CNT1
[SEL2] is
displayed if
loop 2 output is
selected. Process variable (PV2)
Nothing
appears for (C2)
manual control. (REMOTE) Setpoint (SV2)
LOOP 2 Display –
(A2)/(M2)
(LOCAL)
(C2)
(M2) CNT2
Same display
as that of loop 1 Autoselector selection
ATSEL
Loop 2's analog
cascade setting AUT
input value is 1 2
displayed. (SSW)
(M1)/(M2) (A1)/(A2)/(C2)
Manipulated output variable
Y1
Manipulated output
0140E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-65
Loop 1
key lamp
Loop 2
(C) (A) (M)
key lamp
AUT(LS1)
A C (LS1)*1
1 2
CAS(LS2)
M
(C) A1-C2
2 MAN(LS2)
SV2-RMT (SV2-RMT)
M
1 MAN(LS1)
A
2
AUT(LS2)
CAS(LS2)
AUT(LS1)
C
AUT(LS2) 2
(LS1)*1
(A) A
1 A1-A2
SV2-LCL A (SV2-LCL)
2
M M
1 2
MAN(LS1)
MAN(LS2)
AUT(LS1)
(LS1)*1
CAS(LS2) A
MAN(LS1) 1
C M
(M)
2 1
M1-M2
SV2-RMT (SV2-RMT)
A
AUT(LS2) 2
M
2
MAN(LS2)
AUT(LS1)
A A
AUT(LS2) 1 2
M1-M2
(M) (SV2-LCL)
SV2-LCL
C M M
2 1 2
(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)
CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)
* Heavy lines indicate that the SV2-LCL/SV2-RMT status has been changed. * Operation does not change even if the “C” mode key
*1: Transmission of “CAS,” “DDC,” or “SPC” to LS1 using a communication on the LOOP 1 Display is pressed.
command is invalid.

M
1 : Press this key (the number represents
(SV2-LCL) SV2-RMT/SV2-LCL: Loop 2 is in remote or local. the loop concerned).
0141E.ai
Communication
1-66 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Operation Mode Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1 and
Lamps
2 or METER 1 and 2 Displays
Control Function
[SV2-RMT] is displayed.
(in A1-C2 mode, for selection of manual control for
Manual control loop 1) (*1)
Manual control (M2) “M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights.
(M1)
[SV2-LCL] is displayed.
(for selection of manual control for loop 2) (*1)
Cascade setting
Automatic “A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [SV2-RMT] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)
control (A1)
Automatic control (A2) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] is displayed.

Operation Mode Setpoints (SV1, SV2)
External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)
Manual control Manual control Set using a key or through (in SV2-RMT mode)
(M1) (M2) communication (*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
(in SV2-LCL mode)
Cascade setting
automatic control External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)
Automatic control (C2) Set using a key or through
(A1) communication (*1)
Automatic control
(A2)
Manual.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-67
Parameter
Setpoint
Operation
SSW ATSEL Output Variable Operation Mode Output Variable Manipulated Output
Mode
Cascade setting
Outputs control automatic control Outputs control
operation. CNT1 or CNT2,
Automatic (C2) operation.
control (A1) (Loop 1's output = MV + (Loop 2's output = MV + whichever is smaller, is
selected.
Kp1 × E1 if not selected) Automatic control Kp2 × E2 if not selected)
LOW (A2)
Manual control Manual control keys or through
(M1) (M2) communication (manual
operation).
AUT
Cascade setting
Outputs control automatic control Outputs control
operation. CNT1 or CNT2,
Automatic (C2) operation.
control (A1) (Loop 1's output = MV + (Loop 2's output = MV + whichever is larger, is
selected.
Kp1 × E1 if not selected) Automatic control Kp2 × E2 if not selected)
HIGH (A2)
operation).
Cascade setting
automatic control CNT1 output is selected
Automatic Outputs control (C2) regardless of the
– control (A1) operation.
Follows up MV.
magnitude of CNT1 and
Automatic control CNT2 signals.
1 (A2)
Manual control keys or through Manual control
– (M1) communication (*1). (M2)
(Manual operation)
Cascade setting
automatic control CNT2 output is selected
Automatic (C2) Outputs control regardless of the
– control (A1)
Follows up MV.
operation. magnitude of CNT1 and
2 (A2)
– (M1)
Follows up MV.
(M2) communication (*2).
Follows up MV.
(Manual operation)

Manual.
1-68 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(2) Controlling loop 1 based on an external setpoint from analog input and loop 2 using YS1000 1
only
Control Function
YS1000 accepts an external setpoint for loop 1 from analog input (terminal X2) to
perform selector control.

Loop 1's cascade Measurement Measurement

setting input input 1 input 2
X2 X1 X3

[CAS] is displayed
if loop 1 is in
cascade control. LOOP 1 Display
[SV2-LCL] is
displayed if loop 2
is in local. (C1)
[SEL1] is (A1)
displayed if loop 1
output is selected. (M1) (C1)
[SEL2] is –
displayed if loop 2 Setpoint (SV1)
output is selected. (A1)/(M1)
Nothing appears
for manual control. Control element 1
CNT1
Loop 1's analog
cascade setting
input value is
displayed.
Setpoint (SV2)
LOOP 2 Display –
Control element 2
CNT2
(A2)
(M2)
ATSEL
Same display as
that of loop 1 AUT
1 2
(SSW)
(A1)/
(M1)/(M2) (A2)/(C1)
Y1
Manipulated output
0142E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-69
Loop 1
key lamp
Loop 2
(C) (A) (M)
key lamp
(C)
SV2-RMT
CAS(LS1)*1
(LS2)*2
AUT(LS2)
(A)
A
C A 1 AUT(LS1)
1 2
C1-A2 A1-A2
SV2-LCL (SV2-LCL) A
(SV2-LCL) C 1
CAS(LS1) *1 1 A
2
M M M M AUT(LS1)
1 2 1 2
AUT(LS2)
MAN(LS1) MAN(LS1) (LS2)*2
MAN(LS2) MAN(LS2)
(M)
SV2-RMT
AUT(LS1)
A A
AUT(LS2) 1 2
M1-M2
(M) (SV2-LCL)
SV2-LCL
C M M
1 1 2
CAS(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)
(LS2)*2 MAN(LS2)
*1: Transmission of “DDC” or “SPC” to LS1 using a communication * Operation does not change even if the “C” mode key
command is invalid. on the LOOP 2 Display is pressed.
*2: Transmission of “CAS” to LS2 using a communication command is invalid.

M
: Press this key (the number represents
1
(SV2-LCL) SV2-LCL: Loop 2 is in local. the loop concerned).
0143E.ai
Communication
1-70 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Operation Mode Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1
Lamps
and 2 or METER 1 and 2 Displays
Control Function
Manual control
Manual control (M1) “M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] is displayed. (*1)
(M2)
Automatic [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are
Automatic control (A1) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights.
control (A2) displayed. (*1)
Cascade setting automatic Automatic [CAS], [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] is
“C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights.
control (C1) control (A2) displayed. (*1)

Manual control Set using a key or through Set using a key or through
Manual control (M1)
(M2) communication (*1) communication (*2)
Automatic Set using a key or through Set using a key or through
Automatic control (A1)
control (A2) communication (*1) communication (*2)
Cascade setting automatic Automatic External setpoint from analog input Set using a key or through
control (C1) control (A2) (terminal X2) communication (*2)
Manual.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-71
according to the settings of the selector selection switch (SSW) tuning parameter and the
Parameter
Setpoint
Operation Operation
Mode Mode
Cascade setting
automatic
control Outputs control operation. Outputs control operation. CNT1 or CNT2,
Automatic
(C1) (CAS) (Loop 1's output = MV + (Loop 2's output = MV + whichever is smaller, is
control (A2)
Kp1 × E1 if not selected) Kp2 × E2 if not selected) selected.
Automatic
LOW
control (A1)
operation).
AUT
Cascade setting
automatic
control Outputs control operation. Outputs control operation. CNT1 or CNT2,
Automatic
(C1) (CAS) (Loop 1's output = MV + (Loop 2's output = MV + whichever is larger, is
control (A2)
Kp1 × E1 if not selected) Kp2 × E2 if not selected) selected.
Automatic
HIGH
control (A1)
operation).
Cascade setting
automatic CNT1 output is selected
control (C1) Automatic regardless of the
Outputs control operation. Follows up MV.
control (A2) magnitude of CNT1 and
Automatic CNT2 signals.
1 –
control (A1)
or through communication Follows up MV. Follows up MV.
(M1) (M2)
(*1). (Manual operation)
Cascade setting
automatic CNT2 output is selected
control (C1) Automatic regardless of the
Follows up MV. Outputs control operation.
control (A2) magnitude of CNT1 and
Automatic CNT2 signals.
2 –
control (A1)
Follows up MV. or through communication Follows up MV.
(M1) (M2)
(*2). (Manual operation)

Manual.
1-72 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(3) Controlling both loops 1 and 2 based on external setpoints from analog inputs 1
YS1000 accepts an external setpoint for loop 1 from analog input (terminal X2) and that
Control Function
for loop 2 from analog input (terminal X4) to perform selector control.

IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-73
Loop 1's Loop 2's

cascade Measurement cascade Measurement
setting input input 1 setting input input 2
X2 X1 X4 X3
LOOP 1 Display
[CAS] is displayed if
control. (C1)
[SV2-RMT] is (A1)
displayed if loop 2 is
in remote. (M1) (C1)
[SV2-LCL] is –
displayed if loop 2 is
in local. Setpoint
(SV1)
(A1)/(M1)
Same display as that Control element 1
of loop 2 CNT1
Loop 1's analog
cascade setting
input value is
displayed. Process variable (PV2)
(C2)
(REMOTE) Setpoint (SV2)
LOOP 2 Display –
Same display as (A2)/(M2)

that of loop 1 (LOCAL)
[SEL1] is displayed (C2)
if loop 1 output is
selected. Control element 2
[SEL2] is displayed (A2) CNT2
if loop 2 output is
selected. (M2)
Nothing appears
for manual control. Autoselector selection
ATSEL
Loop 2's analog AUT
cascade setting
input value is 1 2
displayed. (SSW)
(A1)/(A2)/
(M1)/(M2) (C2)/(C1)
Y1
Manipulated output
0144E.ai
1-74 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Loop 1
key lamp
1
Loop 2
(C) (A) (M)
key lamp
Control Function
MAN(LS2) MAN(LS1)
AUT(LS1)
M M A C
2 1 1 2 CAS(LS2)
CAS(LS1)*1
CAS(LS2)
(C) C
1 C1-C2
A
1 AUT(LS1)
A1-C2
M
2 MAN(LS2)
SV2-RMT C
2 (SV2-RMT) (SV2-RMT)
C M
CAS(LS1) *1 1 1 MAN(LS1)
A A
2 2
AUT(LS2) AUT(LS2)
CAS(LS2) CAS(LS2)
C C
2 2
CAS(LS1)*1
AUT(LS2)
(A) C
1
A
2
C1-A2
A
1 AUT(LS1)
A1-A2
SV2-LCL
(SV2-LCL) C
(SV2-LCL) A
1
CAS(LS1) *1 1 A
2
M
1
M
2
M M AUT(LS1)
1 2
AUT(LS2)
MAN(LS1) MAN(LS1)
MAN(LS2) MAN(LS2)
CAS(LS1)*1 AUT(LS1)
CAS(LS2) A
1
MAN(LS1)
C M
(M)
1 1
C
2 M1-M2
SV2-RMT (SV2-RMT)
A
AUT(LS2) 2
M
2
MAN(LS2)
AUT(LS1)
A A
AUT(LS2) 1 2
M1-M2
(M) (SV2-LCL)
SV2-LCL
C C M M
1 2 1 2
CAS(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)
CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)
* Heavy lines indicate that the SV2-RMT/SV2-LCL status has been changed.
*1: Transmission of “DDC” or “SPC” to LS1 using a communication
command is invalid.

M
1 : Press this key (the number represents
(SV2-LCL) SV2-RMT/SV2-LCL: Loop 2 is in remote or local. the loop concerned).
0145E.ai
Communication
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-75

Lamps
“M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. (in C1-C2 mode or A1-C2 mode, for selection of
Manual control Manual control manual control for loop 1) (*1)
(M1) (M2)
Cascade setting
automatic control “A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [SV2-RMT] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)
(A1)
Automatic control
“A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)
(A2)
Cascade setting
[CAS], [SV2-RMT], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.
Cascade setting automatic control “C” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights.
(*1)
(C1) Automatic control [CAS], [SV2-LCL], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.
(A2) (*1)
*1: [CSV1] (cascade setting input value) is displayed on the LOOP 1 Display, while [CSV2]
(cascade setting input value) is displayed on the LOOP 2 Display.

Set using a key or through External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)
Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2)
communication (*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
Cascade setting
Automatic control Set using a key or through External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)
(A1) communication (*1)
Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
Cascade setting External setpoint from analog
Cascade setting automatic control (C2) input (terminal X2)
automatic control
(C1) External setpoint from analog
Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
input (terminal X2)

Manual.
1-76 IM 01B08B02-02EN
The following table shows an output variable and control status in each operation mode 1
Control Function
Parameter
Setpoint
Operation Operation
Mode Mode
Cascade setting Cascade setting
automatic Outputs control automatic Outputs control
CNT1 or CNT2,
control (C1) operation. control (C2) operation.
whichever is smaller, is
Automatic Automatic selected.
LOW control (A1) control (A2)
operation).
AUT
automatic Outputs control automatic Outputs control
CNT1 or CNT2,
control (C1) operation. control (C2) operation.
whichever is larger, is
Automatic Automatic selected.
HIGH control (A1) control (A2)
operation).
automatic automatic CNT1 output is selected
control (C1) Outputs control control (C2) regardless of the
Follows up MV.
Automatic Automatic CNT2 signals.
1 – control (A1) control (A2)
Manual control keys or through Manual control
(M1) communication (*1). (M2)
(Manual operation)
automatic automatic CNT2 output is selected
control (C1) control (C2) Outputs control regardless of the
Follows up MV.
Automatic Automatic CNT2 signals.
2 – control (A1) control (A2)
(M1) (M2) communication (*2).
(Manual operation)

Manual.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-77
high-level computer fails in communication), while loop 2 is controlled by YS1000 only.
YS1000 accepts an external setpoint for loop 1 through communication to perform
selector control. If the high-level computer generally performing control fails
in communication, the YS1000 backs up operation. If the computer recovers
Parameter Name Setting Range
BMOD1 Backup mode 1

1-78 IM 01B08B02-02EN
1
input 1 input 2
Control Function
RS-485 communication X1 X3
Communication parameter
SV1
LOOP 1 Display
(C1)
(A1)
[SPC] is displayed if
(M1) (C1)
(SPC)
control. –
Loop 2's [SV2-LCL] Setpoint
is displayed (SV1)
(A1)/(C1)(BUA)/ Control element 1
[SEL1] is displayed if (C1)(BUM) CNT1
loop 1 output is
selected.
[SEL2] is displayed
if loop 2 output is
selected.
Nothing appears for
manual control. Setpoint (SV2)
–
LOOP 2 Display
Control element 2
(A2) CNT2
(M2)
Same display as ATSEL
that of loop 1 AUT
1 2
(SSW)
(C1)(SPC)/
(M1)/(M2)/ (A1)/(A2)/
(C1)(BUM) (C1)(BUA)
Y1
Manipulated output
0146E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-79
Loop 1 key
(C) (A) (M)

lamp
Loop 2
key lamp
(C)
SV2-RMT
Communication recovered (LS2)*2

SPC(LS1)*1
AUT(LS2)
(A) C A A AUT(LS1)
1
1 2 C1(SPC)-A2 A1-A2 A
SV2-LCL (SV2-LCL)
SPC(LS1) C (SV2-LCL) 1
1 A
*1 2
M M M M AUT(LS1)
1 2 1 2
AUT(LS2)
MAN(LS2) MAN(LS2)
(M)
SV2-RMT
AUT(LS1)
AUT(LS2) A A
(M)
1 2
M1-M2
(SV2-LCL)
SV2-LCL
C M M
1 1 2
SPC(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)
(LS2)*2 MAN(LS2)
*1: Transmission of “CAS” to LS1 using a communication * Operation does not change even if the
command is invalid. “C” mode key on the LOOP 2 Display is
*2: Transmission of “CAS” to LS2 using a communication pressed.
command is invalid.
M
An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control 1 : Press this key (the number
A1-A2 (n: “1” denotes loop 1, while “2” means loop 2.) represents the loop concerned).
(SV2-LCL) SV2-LCL: Loop 2 is in local. MAN (LS1): Sends a communication
It is displayed on the control status display section. command.
If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000's
communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in
communication.
The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode.
If communication fails, the operation mode changes to (BUM) or (BUA).
For use of the backup mode If communication recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (SPC).
Setpoint
Loop 2 (BUA) (BUM)
key lamp

another mode can be accomplished using
a key or through communication, but the
(A) BUA-A2 BUM-A2
reverse is not possible.
SV2-LCL (SV2-LCL) (SV2-LCL)
0147E.ai
Communication
1-80 IM 01B08B02-02EN

Operation Mode Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1
Lamps
and 2 or METER 1 and 2 Displays
Control Function
Manual control
Manual control (M1) “M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] is displayed.
(M2)
Automatic
Automatic control (A1) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.
control (A2)
Cascade setting automatic Automatic [SPC], [SV2-LCL], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are
control (C1) (SPC) control (A2) displayed.
“C” lamp lights
Cascade setting automatic Automatic [BUA], [SV2-LCL], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are
and “A” lamp “A” lamp lights.
control (C1) (BUA) control (A2) displayed.
blinks.
“C” lamp lights “A” lamp lights
Cascade setting automatic Automatic
and “M” lamp and “M” lamp [BUM] and [SV2-LCL] are displayed.
control (C1) (BUM) control (A2)
blinks. blinks.

Manual control Set using a key or through Set using a key or through
Manual control (M1)
(M2) communication (*1) communication (*2)
Automatic control Set using a key or through Set using a key or through
(A2) communication (*1) communication (*2)
Cascade setting automatic control Automatic control Set using a key or through
Set through communication (*1).
(C1) (SPC) (A2) communication (*2)
Cascade setting automatic control Automatic control Set using a key or through Set using a key or through
(C1) (BUA) (A2) communication (*1) communication (*2)
Cascade setting automatic control Automatic control Set using a key or through Set using a key or through
(C1) (BUM) (A2) communication (*1) communication (*2)
Manual.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-81
Parameter
Setpoint
SSW ATSEL Operation Mode Output Variable Operation Mode Output Variable Manipulated Output
Cascade setting automatic Outputs control Outputs control
control (C1) (SPC) operation. operation. CNT1 or CNT2,
Automatic control
Automatic control (A1) (Loop 1's output = (Loop 2's output = whichever is smaller,
(A2)
Cascade setting automatic MV + Kp1 × E1 if MV + Kp2 × E2 if is selected.
control (C1) (BUA) not selected) not selected)
LOW
Manual control MV is operated using
Manual control (M1)
(M2) keys or through
Cascade setting automatic Automatic control communication
control (C1) (BUM) (A2) (manual operation).
AUT
Cascade setting automatic Outputs control Outputs control
control (C1) (SPC) operation. operation. CNT1 or CNT2,
Automatic control
Automatic control (A1) (Loop 1's output = (Loop 2's output = whichever is larger, is
(A2)
Cascade setting automatic MV + Kp1 × E1 if MV + Kp2 × E2 if selected.
control (C1) (BUA) not selected) not selected)
HIGH
Manual control
Manual control (M1) MV is operated using
(M2)
keys or through
Cascade setting automatic Automatic control communication
control (C1) (BUM) (A2) (manual operation).
Cascade setting automatic CNT1 output is

control (C1) (SPC) selected regardless
Outputs control Automatic control
Automatic control (A1) Follows up MV. of the magnitude
operation. (A2)
Cascade setting automatic of CNT1 and CNT2
control (C1) (BUA) signals.
1 – MV is operated Manual control

Manual control (M1)
using keys (M2)
or through
communication
Cascade setting automatic (*1). (Manual Automatic control
control (C1) (BUM) operation) (A2)
Cascade setting automatic CNT2 output is

control (C1) (SPC) selected regardless
Automatic control Outputs control
Automatic control (A1) Follows up MV. of the magnitude
(A2) operation.
Cascade setting automatic of CNT1 and CNT2
control (C1) (BUA) signals.
2 – Manual control MV is operated

Manual control (M1)
(M2) using keys
or through
communication
Cascade setting automatic Automatic control (*2). (Manual
control (C1) (BUM) (A2) operation)

Manual.
1-82 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Control Function
Intentionally blank
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-83
high-level computer fails in communication), while loop 2 is based on an external setpoint
from analog input.
YS1000 accepts an external setpoint for loop 1 through communication and an external
setpoint for loop 2 from analog input (terminal X4) to perform selector control. If the high-
level computer generally performing control fails in communication, the YS1000 backs
condition.
BMOD1 Backup mode 1

1-84 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Loop 2's
1
Measurement cascade Measurement
input 1 setting input input 2
Control Function
RS-485 communication
X1 X4 X3
SV1
LOOP 1 Display
(C1)
[SPC] is displayed if
loop 1 is in cascade (A1)
control. (M1) (C1)
[SV2-RMT] is (SPC)
displayed if loop 2 is –
in remote. Setpoint
[SV2-LCL] is (SV1)
displayed if loop 2 is (A1)/(C1)(BUA)/
in local. Control element 1
(C1)(BUM) CNT1
[SEL1] is displayed if
loop 1 output is
selected.
loop 2 output is (C2)
selected. (REMOTE) Setpoint (SV2)
Nothing appears for LOOP 2 Display –
manual control.
(A2)
(LOCAL)
(C2)
Control element 2
(A2) CNT2
(M2)
Same display as that
of loop 1 Autoselector selection
ATSEL
Loop 2's analog AUT
cascade setting 1 2
value is displayed. (SSW)
(C1)(SPC)/(C2)/
(M1)/(M2)/ (A1)/(A2)/
(C1)(BUM) (C1)(BUA)
Y1
Manipulated output
0148E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-85
1-86
Setpoint
Loop 2 (BUA) (BUM)
key lamp
using a key or through communication,
If writing in watchidog timer from the high-level (C) C1(BUA)-C2 C1(BUM)-C2 but the reverse is not possible.
computer is lost during the period set by SV2-RMT (SV2-RMT) (SV2-RMT)
recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (SPC).
For use of the backup mode Loop 1

key lamp
Loop 2 (C) (A) (M)
Setpoint key lamp
key lamp
SPC(LS1)
*1 M
M M
M AUT(LS1)
A C
22 11 1 2
CAS(LS2) CAS(LS2)
C A M MAN(LS2)
(C) 1 1
AUT(LS1) 2
C C1(SPC)-C2 A1-C2
SV2-RMT 2
(SV2-RMT) SPC(LS1) C (SV2-RMT) M
(A) C1(BUA)-A2 1 1 MAN(LS1)
*1
SV2-LCL (SV2-LCL)
AA A
Communication 22 2
CAS(LS2)
CAS(LS2)
Setpoint SPC(LS1) C
*Not available in C
*1 2 the BUM mode. 2
key lamp A
C A AUT(LS1)
1 2 1
(A) C1(SPC)-A2 A1-A2
A
SV2-LCL (SV2-LCL) SPC(LS1) C (SV2-LCL) 1
1 A
*1 2
M M M M AUT(LS1)
1 2 1 2
AUT(LS2)
(A) C1(BUM)-A2 MAN(LS1) MAN(LS1)
MAN(LS2) MAN(LS2)
SV2-LCL (SV2-LCL)
Communication
failed
IM 01B08B02-02EN
Switching from the BUA or BUM mode to AUT(LS1)
another mode can be accomplished using a CAS(LS2) A
MAN(LS1) 1
key or through communication, but the
M
reverse is not possible. 1
C
2
(M) M1-M2
SV2-RMT A (SV2-RMT)
IM 01B08B02-02EN
AUT(LS2) 2
M
2
MAN(LS2)
AUT(LS1)
A A
AUT(LS2) 1 2
(M) M1-M2
(SV2-LCL)
SV2-LCL
C C M M
1 2 1 2
SPC(LS1)*1 MAN(LS1)
CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)
* Heavy lines indicate that the SV2-LCL/SV2-RMT status has been changed.
Cn: Cascade setting automatic control, An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control
(SV2-LCL) SV2-RMT/SV2-LCL: Loop 2 is in remote or local.
M
1 : Press this key (the number represents the loop concerned)
0149E.ai
1-87
Control Function

Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel Lamps Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1 and 2 or
Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 Loop 2 METER 1 and 2 Displays
“M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. (in C1(SPC)-C2 mode or A1-A2 mode, for selection of
Manual control Manual control manual control for loop 1) (*1)
(M1) (M2)
Cascade setting
automatic control “A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [SV2-RMT] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)
Automatic (C2)
control (A1)
Automatic control
“A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed. (*1)
(A2)
Cascade Cascade setting
[SPC], [SV2-RMT], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.
setting automatic control “C” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights.
(*1)
automatic (C2)
control Automatic control [SPC], [SV2-LCL], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.
(C1) (SPC) “C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights.
(A2) (*1)
Cascade setting “C” lamp lights
Cascade [BUA], [SV2-RMT], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.
automatic control and “A” lamp “C” lamp lights.
setting (*1)
(C2) blinks.
automatic
control “C” lamp lights
Automatic control [BUA], [SV2-LCL], and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.
(C1) (BUA) and “A” lamp “A” lamp lights.
(A2) (*1)
blinks.
Cascade setting “C” lamp lights “C” lamp lights
Cascade automatic control and “M” lamp and “M” lamp [BUM] and [SV2-RMT] are displayed. (*1)
setting (C2) blinks. blinks.
automatic
control “C” lamp lights “A” lamp lights
Automatic control
(C1) (BUM) and “M” lamp and “M” lamp [BUM] and [SV2-LCL] are displayed. (*1)
(A2)
blinks. blinks.

Manual control (M2) Set using a key or (in SV2-RMT mode)
Manual control (M1) through communication
(*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
Manual control (M2)
(in SV2-LCL mode)
Cascade setting automatic Set using a key or
Automatic control External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)
control (C2) through communication
(A1)
Automatic control (A2) (*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
Cascade setting Cascade setting automatic
Set through External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)
automatic control control (C2)
communication (*1).
(C1) (SPC) Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
Cascade setting Cascade setting automatic Set using a key or External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)
automatic control control (C2) through communication
(C1) (BUA) Automatic control (A2) (*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
(C1) (BUM) Automatic control (A2) (*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
Manual.
1-88 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Control Function
Output Variables and Control Status in Each Operation Mode (1/2)
Parameter
Setpoint
automatic control automatic control (C2)
(C1) (SPC) Automatic control (A2)
Outputs control Outputs control
operation. Cascade setting operation. CNT1 or CNT2,
Automatic control automatic control (C2) (Loop 2's output =
(Loop 1's output = whichever is smaller, is
(A1)
MV + Kp1 × E1 if not Automatic control (A2) MV + Kp2 × E2 if not selected.
selected) selected)
LOW Cascade setting Cascade setting
(C1) (BUA) Automatic control (A2)
Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) MV is operated
Cascade setting Cascade setting using keys or via
automatic control automatic control (C2) communication (manual
(C1) (BUM) Automatic control (A2) operation).
AUT
Outputs control Outputs control
operation. Cascade setting operation. CNT1 or CNT2,
Automatic control automatic control (C2) (Loop 2's output =
(A1) (Loop 1's output = whichever is larger, is
MV + Kp1 × E1 if not Automatic control (A2) MV + Kp2 × E2 if not selected.
selected) Cascade setting selected)
HIGH Cascade setting
Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2)
MV is operated
Cascade setting Cascade setting using keys or via
Follows up MV. automatic control (C2) Follows up MV.
automatic control communication (manual
(C1) (BUM) Automatic control (A2) operation).

CN1 output is selected
Outputs control Cascade setting
Automatic control regardless of the
operation. automatic control (C2) Follows up MV.
(A1) magnitude of CNT1 and
Automatic control (A2) CNT2 signals.
1 – Cascade setting Cascade setting
Manual control (M1) MV is operated Manual control (M2)
Cascade setting using keys or via Cascade setting
automatic control communication automatic control (C2)
(C1) (BUM) (manual operation). Automatic control (A2)
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-89

Parameter
Setpoint
Cascade setting
Cascade setting automatic control
(C1) (CAS) Automatic control
(A2)
Cascade setting
automatic control CN2 output is selected
Automatic control (C2) Outputs control regardless of the
Follows up MV.
(A1) operation. magnitude of CNT1 and
(A2)
Cascade setting
2 –
(C1) (BUA) Automatic control
(A2)
Manual control
Manual control (M1)
(M2)
MV is operated
Cascade setting
using keys or via
Cascade setting Follows up MV. automatic control Follows up MV.
communication
(manual operation).
(C1) (BUM) Automatic control
(A2)

Manual.
1-90 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(6) Control is performed based on an external manipulated output variable through 1

communication (backed up if the high-level computer fails in communication).
YS1000 accepts an external manipulated output variable through communication
Control Function
to perform selector control. If the high-level computer generally performing control
fails in communication, the YS1000 backs up operation. If the computer recovers
BMOD1 Backup mode 1

IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-91
input 1 input 2
X1 X3
LOOP 1 Display
(C1)
[DDC] is displayed in
cascade control. (A1)
(M1)
Loop 2's [SV2-LCL]
is displayed. –
Setpoint (SV1)
loop 1 output is
selected. Control element 1
[SEL2] is displayed CNT1
if loop 2 output is
selected.
Nothing appears for
manual control. Process variable (PV2)
Setpoint (SV2)
LOOP 2 Display –
Control element 2
(A2) CNT2
(M2)
Same display as that
of loop 1 Autoselector selection
ATSEL
AUT
1 2
(SSW)
(M1)/(M2)/ (A1)/(A2)/
(C1)(BUM) (C1)(BUA)
(C1)(DDC)

MV
Y1
Manipulated output
RS-485
communication
0150E.ai
1-92 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Loop 1 key
1
(C) (A) (M)
lamp
Loop 2
key lamp
Control Function
(C)
SV2-RMT
Communication recovered (LS2)*2

DDC(LS1)*1
AUT(LS2)
(A) C A A AUT(LS1)
1
1 2 C1(DDC)-A2 A1-A2 A
SV2-LCL (SV2-LCL) DDC(LS1) C (SV2-LCL) 1
1 A
*1 2
M M M M AUT(LS1)
1 2 1 2
AUT(LS2)
MAN(LS2) MAN(LS2)
(M)
SV2-RMT
AUT(LS1)
AUT(LS2) A A
(M)
1 2
M1-M2
(SV2-LCL)
SV2-LCL C
1
DDC (LS1)
*1
M M
1 2
MAN(LS1)
(LS2)*2 MAN(LS2)
*1: Transmission of “CAS” to LS1 using a communication * Operation does not change even if the
command is invalid. “C” mode key on the LOOP 2 Display is
*2: Transmission of “CAS” to LS2 using a communication pressed. The loop 2 depends on operation
command is invalid. of the loop 1's “C” mode key.
Cn: Cascade setting automatic control, M
1 : Press this key (the number
A1-A2 An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control represents the loop concerned).
(SV2-LCL) (n: “1” denotes loop 1, while “2” means loop 2.) MAN (LS1): Sends a communication
SV2-LCL: Loop 2 is in local. command.
Communication failed It is displayed on the control status display section.
If writing watchdog timer from the high-level computer is lost during the period set by YS1000's
communication watchdog timer, the YS1000 determines that the computer has failed in
communication.
The YS1000 then disconnects from it and automatically changes the operation mode.
If communication fails, the operation mode changes to (BUM) or (BUA).
For use of the backup mode If communication recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (DDC ).
Setpoint
Loop 2 (BUA) (BUM)
key lamp

another mode can be accomplished using
a key or through communication, but the
(A) C1(BUA)-A2 C1(BUM)-A2
reverse is not possible.
SV2-LCL (SV2-LCL) (SV2-LCL)
0151E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-93

Instrument's Front Panel Control Status Display
Operation Mode
Lamps Sections of LOOP 1 and 2
Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) “M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. [SV2-LCL] is displayed.
Automatic control [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or
Automatic control (A1) “A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights.
(A2) [SEL2] are displayed.
Cascade setting automatic control Automatic control [DDC] and [SV2-LCL] are
(C1) (DDC) (A2) displayed.
“C” lamp lights
Cascade setting automatic control Automatic control [BUA], [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1]
(C1) (BUA) (A2) or [SEL2] are displayed.
blinks.
“C” lamp lights “A” lamp lights
Cascade setting automatic control Automatic control [BUM] and [SV2-LCL] are
and “M” lamp and “M” lamp
(C1) (BUM) (A2) displayed.
blinks. blinks.

Manual control (M2) Set using a key or through Set using a key or through
Manual control (M1)
At change from (A2) to (M2) communication (*1) communication (*2)
Automatic control (A1) Automatic control (A2)
Cascade setting automatic Set using a key or through
Automatic control (A2) Set through communication (*1).
control (C1) (DDC) communication (*2)
Cascade setting automatic Set using a key or through Set using a key or through
control (C1) (BUA) communication (*1) communication (*2)
Cascade setting automatic Set using a key or through Set using a key or through
control (C1) (BUM) communication (*1) communication (*2)
Manual.
1-94 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Control Function
Parameter
Setpoint
Automatic control (A1) Outputs control Automatic control (A2) Outputs control
CNT1 or CNT2,
Cascade setting operation. Cascade setting operation.
whichever is smaller,
automatic control (Loop 1's output = MV + automatic control (C2) (Loop 2's output = MV +
is selected.
(C1) (BUA) Kp1 × E1 if not selected) Automatic control (A2) Kp2 × E2 if not selected)
Cascade setting MV is controlled
LOW automatic control Automatic control (A2) via communication
(C1) (DDC) (manual operation).
Manual control (M1) Follows up MV. Manual control (M2) Follows up MV. MV is controlled
Cascade setting using keys or via
automatic control Automatic control (A2) communication
(C1) (BUM) (manual operation).
AUT
Automatic control (A1) Outputs control Automatic control (A2) Outputs control
CNT1 or CNT2,
Cascade setting operation. Cascade setting operation.
whichever is larger, is
automatic control (Loop 1's output = MV + automatic control (C2) (Loop 2's output = MV +
selected.
(C1) (BUA) Kp1 × E1 if not selected) Automatic control (A2) Kp2 × E2 if not selected)
HIGH automatic control Automatic control (A2) via communication
Manual control (M1) Follows up MV. Manual control (M2) Follows up MV. MV is controlled
automatic control Automatic control (A2) communication
(C1) (BUM) (manual operation).
Automatic control (A1) Automatic control (A2) CNT1 output is
selected regardless
Cascade setting Outputs control Cascade setting
Follows up MV. of the magnitude
automatic control operation. automatic control (C2)
of CNT1 and CNT2
(C1) (BUA) Automatic control (A2) signals.
1 – automatic control Follows up MV. Automatic control (A2) Follows up MV. via communication
Manual control (M1) MV is controlled Manual control (M2)
automatic control communication (*1). Automatic control (A2)
(C1) (BUM) (Manual operation)
Automatic control (A1) Automatic control (A2) CNT2 output is
Cascade setting Outputs control selected regardless
Cascade setting Follows up MV. automatic control (C2) operation. of the magnitude
automatic control of CNT1 and CNT2
(C1) (BUA) Automatic control (A2) signals.
2 –
automatic control Follows up MV. Automatic control (A2) Follows up MV. via communication
Manual control (M1) Manual control (M2) MV is controlled
automatic control Automatic control (A2) communication (*2).
(C1) (BUM) (Manual operation)

Manual.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-95
(7) Performing control based on external manipulated output variable through communication
(backing it up if the high-level computer fails in communication) and based on an external
setpoint for loop 2 from analog input
YS1000 accepts an external manipulated output variable through communication and an
external setpoint for loop 2 from analog input (terminal X4) to perform selector control. If
the high-level computer generally performing control fails in communication, the YS1000
backs up operation. If the computer recovers communication, control returns to the
original condition.
BMOD1 Backup mode 1

1-96 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Loop 2's
Measurement cascade Measurement 1
input 1 setting value input 2
Control Function
X1 X4 X3
LOOP 1 Display
[DDC] is displayed if (C1)

control. (A1)
Same display as that (M1)

of loop 2 –
Setpoint (SV1)
loop 1 output is
Control element 1
selected.
[SEL2] is displayed if CNT1
loop 2 output is
selected.
Nothing appears for
manual control.
(C2)
(REMOTE) Setpoint (SV2)
LOOP 2 Display –
Same display as that (C2) (A2)/(M2)

of loop 1 (LOCAL)
Control element 2
(A2) CNT2
[SV2-RMT] is
displayed if loop 2 is in (M2)
remote.
[SV2-LCL] is displayed Autoselector selection
if loop 2 is in local. ATSEL
Nothing appears for AUT
manual control.
1 2
Loop 2's analog (SSW)
cascade setting input
value is displayed.
(M1)/(M2)/ (C1)/(A1)/(A2)/
(C1)(BUM) (C1)(BUA)
(C1)(DDC)

Communication
parameter MV
Y1
Manipulated output
RS-485
communication
0152E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-97
1-98
Setpoint
Loop 2 (BUA) (BUM)
key lamp
using a key or through communication,
If writing in watchdog timer from the high-level (C) C1(BUA)-C2 C1(BUM)-C2 but the reverse is not possible.
computer is lost during the period set by REM (REM) (REM)
YS1000's communication watchdog timer, the
recovers, it returns to (C) (CMP) (DDC).

lamp
Loop 2 (C) (A) (M)
Setpoint key lamp

key lamp
DDC(LS1)
*1 M M A C AUT(LS1)
2 1 1 2
CAS(LS2) CAS(LS2)
C
1 A M MAN(LS2)
1 AUT(LS1) 2
(C) C
2 C1(DDC)-C2 A1-C2
SV2-RMT (SV2-RMT) DDC(LS1) C (SV2-RMT) M
(A) 1 1 MAN(LS1)
C1(BUA)-A2 *1
SV2-LCL (LCL)
Communication A A
2 2
CAS(LS2)
CAS(LS2)
DDC(LS1) *Not available in
Setpoint C C
*1 2 the BUM mode. 2
key lamp C A A AUT(LS1)
1 2 1
(A) C1(DDC)-A2 A1-A2 A
SV2-LCL (SV2-LCL) DDC(LS1) C (SV2-LCL) 1
1 A
*1 2
M M M M AUT(LS1) DDC
1 2 1 2
AUT(LS2) (LS1)
MAN(LS1) MAN(LS1) *1
(A) C1(BUM)-A2
MAN(LS2) MAN(LS2)
SV2-LCL (LCL) C
1
Communication
failed
IM 01B08B02-02EN
Switching from the BUA or BUM mode to AUT(LS1)
another mode can be accomplished using a CAS(LS2) A
MAN(LS1) 1
key or through communication, but the
C M
reverse is not possible. 1 1
C
2
(M) M1-M2
SV2-RMT A (SV2-RMT)
AUT(LS2) 2
M
2
IM 01B08B02-02EN
MAN(LS2)
AUT(LS1)
A A
AUT(LS2) 1 2
(M) M1-M2
(SV2-LCL)
SV2-LCL C
1 DDC (LS1)
*1
C M M
2 1 2
MAN(LS1)
CAS(LS2) MAN(LS2)
* Heavy lines indicate that the SV2-LCL/SV2-RMT status has been changed.
Cn: Cascade setting automatic control, An: Automatic control, Mn: Manual control
(SV2-LCL) SV2-RMT/SV2-LCL: Loop 2 is in remote or local.
M : Press this key (the number represents the loop concerned)

1

0153E.ai
1-99
Control Function

Operation Mode Instrument's Front Panel Lamps Control Status Display Sections of LOOP 1
Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 Loop 2 and 2 or METER 1 and 2 Displays
Manual control
Manual control (M1) [SV2-RMT] is displayed.
(M2)
“M” lamp lights. “M” lamp lights. (in C1(DDC)-C2 mode or A1-C2 mode, for
selection of manual control for loop 1) (*1)
Cascade setting
[SV2-RMT] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are
automatic control “A” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights.
displayed. (*1)
Automatic control (A1) (C2)
Automatic control [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are displayed.
“A” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights.
(A2) (*1)
Cascade setting
Cascade setting automatic control “C” lamp lights. “C” lamp lights. [DDC] and [SV2-RMT] are displayed. (*1)
(C1) (DDC) Automatic control
“C” lamp lights. “A” lamp lights. [DDC] and [SV2-LCL] are displayed. (*1)
(A2)
Cascade setting “C” lamp lights
[BUA], [SV2-RMT] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are
automatic control and “A” lamp “C” lamp lights.
Cascade setting displayed. (*1)
(C2) blinks.
automatic control
Automatic control [BUA], [SV2-LCL] and [SEL1] or [SEL2] are
(A2) displayed. (*1)
blinks.
Cascade setting “C” lamp lights “C” lamp lights
automatic control and “M” lamp and “M” lamp [BUM] and [SV2-RMT] are displayed. (*1)
automatic control
Automatic control
and “M” lamp and “M” lamp [BUM] and [SV2-LCL] are displayed. (*1)
(A2)
blinks. blinks.

Cascade setting automatic External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)
control (C2) Set using a key or (in SV2-RMT mode)
Automatic control
through communication
(A1) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
Automatic control (A2) (*1)
(in SV2-LCL mode)
Manual control (M2)
Set using a key or External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)
At change from (C2) to (M2)
Manual control (M1) through communication
Manual control (M2) (*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
At change from (A2) to (M2)
Cascade setting Cascade setting automatic
Set through External setpoint from analog input (terminal X4)
automatic control control (C2)
communication (*1).
(C1) (DDC) Automatic control (A2) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
(C1) (BUA) Automatic control (A2) (*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
(C1) (BUM) Automatic control (A2) (*1) Set using a key or through communication (*2)
Manual.
1-100 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Control Function
Parameter
Setpoint
Automatic control Cascade setting
(A1) Outputs control automatic control (C2) Outputs control
operation. Automatic control (A2) operation. CNT1 or CNT2, whichever is
Cascade setting (Loop 1's output = (Loop 2’s output
Cascade setting smaller, is selected.
automatic control MV + Kp1 × E1 if not = MV + Kp2 × E2
selected) automatic control (C2) if not selected)
(C1) (BUA)
Cascade setting Cascade setting MV is operated via
LOW
automatic control automatic control (C2) communication (manual
(C1) (DDC) Automatic control (A2) operation).
Manual control
Follows up MV. Manual control (M2) Follows up MV.
(M1) MV is operated using keys or
Cascade setting Cascade setting via communication (manual
automatic control automatic control (C2) operation).
(C1) (BUM) Automatic control (A2)
AUT
Cascade setting
Automatic control Outputs control automatic control (C2) Outputs control
(A1) operation. Automatic control (A2) operation. CNT1 or CNT2, whichever is
(Loop 1’s output = (Loop 2’s output
Cascade setting Cascade setting larger, is selected.
MV + Kp1 × E1 if not = MV + Kp2 × E2
automatic control selected) automatic control (C2) if not selected)
HIGH automatic control (C2)
automatic control
(C1) (DDC) Automatic control (A2)
Manual control MV is operated using keys or
Follows up MV. Manual control (M2) Follows up MV. via communication (manual
(M1)
operation).
Cascade setting
Automatic control automatic control (C2)
(A1) Outputs control CNT1 output is selected
operation. Follows up MV. regardless of the magnitude
Cascade setting Cascade setting of CNT1 and CNT2 signals.
Cascade setting Cascade setting MV is operated via
1 –
automatic control Follows up MV. automatic control (C2) Follows up MV. communication (manual
(C1) (DDC) Automatic control (A2) operation).
Manual control
MV is operated Manual control (M2)
(M1)
using keys or via
Cascade setting Cascade setting Follows up MV. Follows up MV.
communication (*1).
(Manual operation)
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-101

Parameter
Setpoint
Cascade setting
automatic control
(A1)
Automatic control
(A2) CNT2 output is selected
Outputs control
Follows up MV. regardless of the magnitude
Cascade setting operation.
of CNT1 and CNT2 signals.
(C1) (BUA) Automatic control
(A2)
Cascade setting
2 –
Cascade setting automatic control MV is operated via
automatic control Follows up MV. (C2) Follows up MV. communication (manual
(C1) (DDC) Automatic control operation).
(A2)
(M1) (M2) MV is operated
Cascade setting Follows up MV. automatic control communication Follows up MV.
automatic control (C2) (*2). (Manual
(C1) (BUM) Automatic control operation)
(A2)

► For setting through communication: see YS1000 Series Communication Interface User’s
Manual.
1-102 IM 01B08B02-02EN
1.1.4 Control in the Programmable Mode (CTL = PROG) (YS1700 Only) 1

The YS1700 controllers incorporate the computation and control functions necessary for
control as computation function libraries. In the programmable mode, these functions are
Control Function
combined in programs to create computation and control functions.
► For setting displays and setting details: see 1.1, Selecting the Controller Mode (CTL), in this
manual.
► For programmable mode: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable Function
User’s Manual.
X1 X5 X6 X8 DI6/DO1 DI5/DO2 DI4/DO3 DI3/DO4 DI2/DO5 DI1/DO6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10
to to
DIn/DOn terminals are shared; they can be used by

Expandable I/O designating either one of them. Expandable I/O
Programs created by the customer
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 DI6/DO1 DI5/DO2 DI4/DO3 DI3/DO4 DI2/DO5 DI1/DO6 DO7 DO8 DO9 DO10
Expandable DIn/DOn terminals are shared; they should be used by

I/O specifying either of them. Expandable I/O
0154E.ai
The program below is set at factory shipment.
X1 X2
CSV1
BSC1

SV1
Y1 Y2 Y3
0154-01E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-103
1.2 Selecting the Control Method (Selecting
Control Type CNT and Control Operation
Formula ALG)
Setting Display
Engineering Display Operation Display > + SHIFT
Display) > SHIFT
0155E.ai
Setting Details

PID: Standard PID control
S-PI: Sample-and-hold PI control
CNT1, CNT2 Control type PID
BATCH: Batch PID control (*1)
PD: Proportional (PD) control (*2)
Control I-PD: PV proportional type PID
ALG1, ALG2 operation PI-D: PV derivative type PID I-PD
formula SVF: Adjustable setpoint filter
*1: Selectable only in YS1700
*2: For proportional PD control, always select PV derivative type PID (PI-D).
The CNT2 and ALG2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable
mode.
Table Controller Modes and Control Types
Controller Mode Cascade Mode Selector Mode

Single-loop Mode
Control Type Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 1 Loop 2
Standard PID control     
Proportional (PD) control  – – – –
Sample-and-hold PI control    – –
Batch PID control – – – – –
Legend : Available, –: Not available
1-104 IM 01B08B02-02EN
1.2 Selecting the Control Method (Selecting Control Type CNT and Control Operation Formula ALG)
The control types (CNT) and control operation formulas (ALG) should be set as shown 1
below according to the control purpose:
CNT ALG
Control Function
PID PD S-PI BATCH PI-D I-PD SVF
1.2.1, Performing Stable Control without Abrupt Output Changes
 
(PV Proportional Type PID (I-PD))
1.2.2, Performing Control with Emphasis on Setpoint Follow-up
 
(PV Derivative Type PID (PI-D))
1.2.6, Performing Stable Control for the Step Response of Setpoints
 
(Adjustable Setpoint Filter)
1.2.4, Performing Stable Control in Which a Setpoint is not Exceeded
 
(Proportional (PD) Control)
1.2.9, Controlling a Process with Long Dead Time
   
(Sample-and-hold PI Control)
1.2.10, Performing Control with Rapidly Settling Setpoints
   
(Batch PID Control (YS1700 Programmable Mode Only))
1.2.3, Stopping Integral Action to Conduct Control with Less Overshoot
   
(Output Limiter)
1.2.5, Performing Control with Quick Rise
   
(PID Control with Reset Bias)
1.2.7, Performing Control with Gain Characteristics Such as Neutralization
    
Control (Non-linear PID Control)
1.2.8, Performing Control Canceling out Disturbance
    
(Feedforward Control)
1.2.11, Performing Control Switching Multiple PID Parameters
      
(Preset PID (in YS1700 Programmable Mode Only))
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-105
1.2.1 Performing Stable Control without Abrupt Output Changes (PV

Proportional Type PID (I-PD))
Description
Proportional action (P) and derivative action (D) operate on a process variable (PV)
rather than a deviation (E). Because changing a setpoint (SV) does not activate
proportional action (P) or derivative action (D), the output (MV) does not change abruptly.
This control offers stable control characteristics with respect to a characteristic change in
the control target, load variations, or disturbance. It is particularly useful for cases where
a setpoint (SV) is quickly changed through communication from the high-level system.
100  1 TD•S 

MV=  PV+ •E+ •PV 
PB  TI•S 1+(TD/m)S 
0156E.ai
where MV: manipulated output variable, PV: process variable, E: deviation (E = PV – SV), PB:
proportional band, TI: integral time, TD: derivative time, m: derivative gain, and S: Laplacian
operator
- 1 + + 100
SV MV
+ TI•S + PB
PV

TD•S
1+(TD/m)S
0157E.ai
PV Proportional Type PID (I-PD) Function Block Diagram
Setting Details
Parameter Name Setpoint Display Transition and Display Title

Control Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG2]
ALG1, ALG2 operation I-PD (Configuration Display 2)
formula
mode.
1-106 IM 01B08B02-02EN
1.2.2 Performing Control with Emphasis on Setpoint Follow-up (PV Derivative 1

Type PID (PI-D))
Control Function
Description
Proportional action (P) and integral action (I) operate on a deviation (E), while derivative
action (D) operates on a process variable (PV). This control is useful for cases where
emphasis is placed on the follow-up capability of a process variable (PV) such as the
loop 2 in cascade control.
100  1 TD•S 

MV=  E+ •E+ •PV 
PB  TI•S 1+(TD/m)S 
0158E.ai
where MV: manipulated output variable, PV: process variable, E: deviation (E = PV – SV), P:
proportional band, TI: integral time, TD: derivative time, m: derivative gain, and S: Laplacian
operator
SV
- 1 + + 100 MV
+ TI•S + PB
PV

TD•S
1+(TD/m)S
0159E.ai
PV Derivative Type PID (PI-D) Function Block Diagram
PV (PV derivative type PID (PI-D))
PV (PV proportional type PID (I-PD))

Setpoint (SV)
Time
Setpoint (SV) change
0160E.ai
Response Waveform of PV Proportional Type PID (I-PD) and PV Derivative Type PID (PI-D)
Setting Details

ALG1, ALG2 operation PI-D (Configuration Display 2)
formula
mode.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-107
1.2.3 Stopping Integral Action to Conduct Control with Less Overshoot (Output
Limiter)
Description
If a manipulated output (MV) appears to exceed a limit value (high limit setpoint of MV (MH)
or low limit setpoint of MV (ML)), this control stops integral action (I) to prevent reset
windup (saturated output status caused by integral action (I)), thereby achieving stable
control with less overshoot.
The following table shows the action of manipulated output (MV) according to the settings
of MH and ML.
Action of Manipulated Output (MV)

MV operates in the setting range.
MH > ML
* For manual control (M), MV operates in the range of −6.3 to 106.3%.
MH ≤ ML Do not set.
Setting Details

PI-D, I-PD, (Configuration Display 2)
ALG1, ALG2 operation
SVF
formula
mode.
► For PI-D setpoint: see 1.2.2, Performing Control with Emphasis on Setpoint Follow-up (PV
Derivative Type PID (PI-D)), in this manual.
► For I-PD setpoint: see 1.2.1, Performing Stable Control without Abrupt Output Changes (PV
Proportional Type PID (I-PD)), in this manual.
► For SVF setpoint: see 1.2.6, Performing Stable Control for the Step Response of Setpoints
(Adjustable Setpoint Filter), in this manual.
Display Transition and Display

Title
MH1, MH2 High limit setpoint of MV −6.3 to 106.3% Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting
Display 1) or [PID2] (PID Setting
ML1, ML2 Low limit setpoint of MV −6.3 to 106.3% Display 2)
The MH2 and ML2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable
mode.
1-108 IM 01B08B02-02EN
1.2.4 Performing Stable Control in Which a Setpoint is not Exceeded 1

(Proportional (PD) Control)
Control Function
Description
This control type performs control in which integral action (I) is excluded from PID action.
It is useful when stable control without overshoot is desired for integral processes in
which constant flows are delivered.
Note that to use proportional (PD) control, be sure to set PV derivative type PID (PI-D)
for the control operation formula (ALG).
100  TD•S 

MV=  E+ •PV  +MR
PB  1+(TD/m)S 
0161E.ai
where MV: manipulated output variable, PV: process variable, E: deviation (E = PV – SV), PB:
proportional band, TD: derivative time, m: derivative gain, S: Laplacian operator, and MR: manual
reset
If the operation mode is switched to change proportional band (PB), first-order lag follow-
up is performed to achieve bumpless output. It is also possible to use this type of control
together with non-linear PID control.
The table below shows operations performed when the operation mode is switched.
Status Effected Instantly upon Transition to Each

Operation Mode Transition Operation Mode
Setpoint (SV) Control Status
SV immediately before Switching is made bumplessly
(1) (C)(CAS) → (A)
transition is held. to perform automatic control.
A manipulated output variable
SV immediately before
(2) (C)(CAS) → (M) immediately before transition is
transition is held.
held, enabling manual operation.
(3) (C)(CMP)(SPC) → – The operation mode is changed in the same way as the (CAS)
(4) (C)(CMP)(DDC) → – mode.
If the (C) mode is not used, to prevent inadvertent operation
(5) (C) → – the operation mode does not change even if the “C” mode
key is pressed.
Quick response to a A first-order lag is followed up to
(6) (A) → (C)
cascade setting value continue control.
SV immediately before
(7) (A) → (M) Manual operation
transition is held.
Switching directly from (M) to (C) is impossible. (Switch
(8) (M) → (C) once from (M) to (A) and then switch from (A) to (C)). It is,
however, possible in the DDC mode.
SV immediately before A first-order lag is followed up to
(9) (M) → (A)
transition is held. continue control.
* For the meaning of the (M), (A), (C), (CAS), (CMP), (SPC), and (DDC) symbols, see 1.1,
Selecting the Controller Mode (CTL), in this manual.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-109
Operation Mode
(C) (A) (M) (A) (C)

Setpoint change
Setpoint
Cascade setting value
Time
Output variable Manual operation
First-order lag follow-up

Time
(Cases where a process variable is
almost constant in direct action)
See the table on a

(1) (7) (9) (6) ←previous page.
0162E.ai
Operation Mode Switching and Changing of Setpoint (SV) and Manipulated Output Variable (MV)
Example of use of proportional (PD) control

(1) Liquid level control of tanks (integral process control)
This is the control of the rate of inflow to regulate the liquid level in integral processes
where a constant flow is delivered using a metering pump.
Proportional (PD) control enables stable control results to be obtained in which no
overshoot is caused.
YS1700/YS1500 proportional (PD) control

0% output
SV MR=50%+α
100% output
Constant flow
0163E.ai
Legend SV: setpoint, MR: manual reset
Integral Process Control
1-110 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(2) Control of the end-point in chemical reactions 1

In processes where raw materials are heated to promote thermal chemical reactions
in the formation of products, it is necessary to detect product formation status using
Control Function
an analyzer to close the heat steam valve according to a setpoint (end point) so that
overheating is not caused in control.
YS1700/YS1500 proportional (PD) control
Compositions
Composition
analyzer 0% output (valve closed)
Jacket
Reactor
Steam SV
PB
100% output Manual reset to 0%

Process variables
of composition
Start of reaction End of reaction
Example of chemical reaction end-point control

0164E.ai
Legend SV: setpoint, PB: proportional band
Chemical Reaction End-point Control
Setting Details

CNT1, CNT2 Control type PD
ALG1, ALG2 operation PI-D (Configuration Display 2)
formula
mode.

Title
MR1, MR2 Manual reset −6.3 to 106.3% Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting
Integral time (first-order Display 1) or [PID2] (PID Setting
TI1, TI2 1 to 9999 sec Display 2)
lag follow-up time)
The MR2 and TI2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the programmable mode.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-111
1.2.5 Performing Control with Quick Rise (PID Control with Reset Bias)
Description
PID control with reset bias is used if it is desired to achieve response with quick rise by
positively utilizing reset windup. It is useful for controlling heating processes, pressure
release values, etc.
Because the output’s saturated bias is arbitrarily set in reset bias (RB), the time taken
between the instant when a process variable (PV) starts to recover and the instant when
a manipulated output variable (MV) deviates a limit value can be set.
Adjustment method
Increasing the reset bias (RB) improves the response characteristics, shortening the
time required for the process variable to reach the setpoint (SV). If RB is set to 100%
or higher, corrective action starts after the positions of the setpoint (SV) and process
variable (PV) reverse one another.
Moreover, if RB is set to 0%, PID control in which the reset bias (RB) is disabled is
performed. An optimum reset bias (RB) value should be empirically determined by
observing the response characteristics.
Examples of usage
(1) Batch process temperature control
PV
End of batch Start of batch
Raw material
ON/OFF SV (set temperature)
command
MV PV (temperature)
PV (for RB = 0%)
Steam
MV'=MH + RB
Valve MH
Stop valve
RB
MV (valve opening) MV (for RB = 0%)
Simple batch process
Time
0165E.ai
Simple Batch Heating Process
In a simple batch heating process like the one above, when a batch process ends, the
steam stop valve is closed according to the setpoint (SV) and operation mode remains
unchanged.
The manipulated output variable (MV) is limited at the high limit setpoint of MV (MH)
while the batch process is stopped. Note that the manipulated output variable (MV’)
before passing through the high limit setpoint of MV (MH) is clamped at “MH + RB”
due to the effects of the reset bias (RB) (reset windup status). If the next batch process
starts in this condition, the steam valve is opened, causing the process variable (PV) to
increase gradually. The release of the manipulated output variable (MV) from the output
limit point is delayed due to the effects of the reset bias (RB).
Therefore, process variable (PV) rise times can be improved.
In contrast, if the reset bias (RB) = 0, there is no reset windup; the manipulated output
variable is immediately released from the high limit setpoint of MV (MH) as the process
variable starts to rise. This causes the process variable (PV) rise time to be longer.
1-112 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(2) Controlling pressure release valves and safety valves 1

Pressure release valves and safety valves are controlled with the reset bias (RB)
value set to 100%. A safety valve is closed in a steady-state condition, and its
Control Function
internal pressure rises in the event of a process abnormality. If the internal pressure
exceeds the safety valve opening setpoint, the valve releases the internal pressure
to provide process safety.
Abnormality
occurred Abnormality
PV YS1700/YS1500 removed
SV (safety PV
Pressure valve releasing (internal pressure)
signal setpoint)
Normal Normal
MV value value
Safety valve
release region
Safety valve MV
Process
ML closed
RB RB
MV'=ML-RB
Time
0166E.ai
Safety Valve Control
Setting Details

Control Tuning Display > Engineering Display >
ALG1, ALG2 operation PI-D, I-PD, SVF [CONFIG2] (Configuration Display 2)
formula
mode.
Parameter Name Setting Range Display Transition and Display Title

Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting
RB1, RB2 Reset bias 0.0 to 106.3%
Display 1) or [PID2] (PID Setting Display 2)
The RB2 parameter is used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-113
1.2.6 Performing Stable Control for the Step Response of Setpoints (Adjustable
Setpoint Filter)
Description
The values of optimum PID parameters (proportional band (PB), integral time (TI), and
derivative time (TD)) that minimize a disturbance (D) that is superimposing on a process
variable (PV) do not necessarily agree with the optimum PID parameters that deliver
follow-up capabilities for setpoint (SV) change.
When YS1000 control with the adjustable setpoint filter (SVF), if the setpoint (SV)
is changed in steps with the optimum PID parameters for limiting disturbance left
unchanged, the response tends to be overshot.
Thus, a filtering operation is conducted for the setpoint (SV) to optimally adjust the step
response waveform.
Operation principle
This control adds filters to the setpoint (SV) using the PV derivative type PID (PI-D)
control algorithm as a basis.
Adjusting the setpoint filters α (SFA) and β (SFB) enables the adjustment of follow-up
capability with respect to changing the setpoint (SV) without changing the optimum PID
parameters.
For the setpoint filters α (SFA) and β (SFB), see “Effects of Setpoint Filters α (SFA) and β
(SFB)” which follows.
The following shows the operation formula for an adjustable setpoint filter (SVF).
1+(α•TI−β•TD)S
SVF=
1+(TI+TD)S
0167E.ai
where SVF: adjustable setpoint filter, α and β: setpoint filters, TI: integral time, TD: derivative time,
and S: Laplacian operator
α = 0 to 1, β = 0 to 1
α • TI − β • TD ≥ 0
If β = 0, TD in the formula = 0
1+(α•TI−β•TD)S - 1 + + 100 MV PV
SV GP(S)
1+(TI+TD)S + TI•S + PB
(If β = 0, TD in the formula = 0) GP: process transfer
function
TD•S
1+(TD/m)S
0168E.ai
Adjustable Setpoint Filter (SVF) Function Block Diagram
1-114 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Operation characteristics 1
The adjustable setpoint filter (SVF) shows filtering characteristics = 1 if setpoint filter α
(SFA) = 1 and setpoint filter β (SFB) = 0, which is equivalent to PV derivative type PID
Control Function
(PI-D).
Moreover, if setpoint filter α (SFA) = 0 and setpoint filter β (SFB) = 0, the filtering
characteristics change to first-order lag operation where integral time (TI) is regarded
as the time constant, causing the adjustable setpoint filter to be equivalent to PV
proportional type PID (I-PD).
Setting setpoint filter α (SFA) to a range of 0 < α < 1 enables a follow-up waveform
intermediate to those obtained by two control operation formulas (ALG) to be achieved in
proportion to the magnitude of α.
α=1, β=0
Optimum α, β
Setpoint (SV)
α=0, β=1
Time
Setpoint (SV) change
0169E.ai
Response Waveform of Adjustable Setpoint Filter (SVF)
Effects of setpoint filters α (SFA) and β (SFB)

The figure below shows follow-up waveforms of setpoint (SV) generated when setpoint
filters α (SFA) and β (SFB) are changed from 0 to 1 respectively.
PV α =1.0 PV
β =0.0
α =0.6 β =0.3
α =0.3 Fixed to β = 0 β =0.6 Fixed to α = 0.5
β =1.0
α =0.0
0 Time 0 Time
0170E.ai
Effects of Setpoint Filters α (SFA) and β (SFB)
Setpoint filter α (SFA) is effective in achieving follow-up capability. A more abrupt follow-
up waveform is obtained as the value of setpoint filter α (SFA) gets greater.
Setpoint filter β (SFB) is a fine-tuning parameter and enables the effects of improvements
on follow-up waveforms in which the overshoot is small to be achieved as its value gets
greater.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-115
Tuning method
(1) Cases not using the self-tuning (STC) function
• Vary the manipulated output variable (MV) to obtain the optimum PID parameter
based on its response.
• Change a setpoint (SV) in steps to adjust setpoint filter α (SFA) so that the
desired follow-up waveform is obtained. For control provided with derivative
action (D), make further fine adjustments using setpoint filter β (SFB).
• The recommended values of setpoint filters α (SFA) and β (SFB) are 0.5 for
setpoint filter α (SFA) and 0.0 for setpoint filter β (SFB).
(2) Cases using the self-tuning (STC) function

Using the self-tuning (STC) function, determine PID parameters that limit a
disturbance (D) and obtain setpoint filter α (SFA) so that follow-up is made with
respect to a setpoint (SV). However, setpoint filter β (SFB) is not calculated.
To use the self-tuning (STC) function, set setpoint filter α (SFA) = 0.5 and setpoint
filter β (SFB) = 0.0.
► For self-tuning (STC) function: see Chapter 7, Self-tuning Function, in this manual.
Example of usage
The adjustable setpoint filter is useful in the following cases:
(1) Loop 2 in cascade control (cases where use of PV derivative type PID (PI-D) results
in an abrupt response)
(2) Program temperature control
(3) Control loop where setpoint (SV) changes are frequent
Setting Details
Title
CNT1, CNT2 Control type PID Tuning Display > Engineering

Display > [CONFIG2] (Configuration
ALG1, ALG2 Control operation formula SVF Display 2)
mode.

Title
Adjustable setpoint filter
SFA1, SFA2 0.000 to 1.000 Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting
α
Display 1) or [PID2] (PID Setting
Adjustable setpoint filter Display 2)
SFB1, SFB2 0.000 to 1.000
β
The SFA2 and SFB2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable
mode.
1-116 IM 01B08B02-02EN
1.2.7 Performing Control with Gain Characteristics Such as Neutralization 1

Control (Non-linear PID Control)
Control Function
Description
Non-linear PID control multiplies a deviation (E) by the non-linear control gain (GG) if the
deviation is smaller than the non-linear control gap width (GW), or multiplies it by “1” if it
is greater than GW.
This control type is useful for achieving follow-up capability for setpoint (SV) changes or
for the control of a noisy flow system.
The following shows an operation diagram of non-linear PID control.

Output of a non-linear element
This inclination is
non-linear control
gain (GG) 10%
Offset

10% Deviation
GG=1
(Deviation =
non-linear output)
GW=10%
GG=0
0171E.ai
Operation of Non-linear PID Control
The table below shows the action of non-linear PID control based on the setting of the
non-linear control gain.
Setpoint Operation Description

• The output of the non-linear element becomes 0% within the non-
linear gap.
GG = 0.000
• Calculation is made with the gain as “1” if the deviation is out of the
non-linear control gap width (GW). (*)
• The result of deviation (E) × non-linear control gain (GG) is output if
the deviation is within the non-linear control gap width (GW).
0.000 < GG < 1.000
• Calculation is made with the gain as “1” if the deviation is out of the
non-linear control gap width (GW). (*)
An output is always produced with respect to deviation (E). Deviation (E)
GG = 1.000
= non-linear output
*: An output having an offset with respect to deviation (E) is produced.
Non-linear element
Non-linear element's output
– E +
SV TI PB
+ MV
+ Proportional gain
1+TD
PV
0172E.ai
Non-linear PID Control Function Block Diagram
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-117
Examples of Usage
(1) Follow-up capability with respect to setpoint (SV) changes
Non-linear PID control is used to limit overshoots.
Presetting a smaller proportional band (PB) enables follow-up capability to be
obtained with respect to setpoint (SV) change. If a deviation falls within the non-
linear control gap width (GW), the output is limited by the action of the non-linear
control gain (GG).
Linear PID control Non-linear PID control
PV PV
SV SV
Time Time
0173E.ai
Response of Non-linear PID Control Made When Setpoint (SV) is Changed
(2) Limiting noise or periodic pulsation

For the control of a noisy flow system, if the deviation (E) is small, the gain is low;
the displacement of the control valve is smoothed, enabling the process to stabilize.
If the deviation (E) is large, the action of the proportional band (PB) that has been
preset to a small value delivers strong pull-back effects, improving responsiveness.
100 100
80 80
Flow rate
Flow rate
60 60
40 40
0 0
Time Time
0174E.ai
Effects of Non-linear PI Control on a Noisy Flow System
1-118 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(3) Averaging level control 1

Use of non-linear PID control enables a uniform outflow rate to be obtained that is
not susceptible to minute variations in liquid level caused by splashes, turbulence,
Control Function
boiling, etc.
For example, it is desirable for a surge tank that the rate of outflow from a
manufacturing process (level control’s manipulated output variable) is stabilized
rather than achieving precise level control.
Manufacturing Rate of outflow

process +
Liquid level
0
SV –
100
Outflow
rate
0
% Time
Non-linear PI control protects the outflow rate from being
affected by minute variations in the liquid level.
0175E.ai
Averaging Level Control and Control Characteristics
(4) Neutralization control

It is difficult for linear PID control to achieve neutralization control because the acid
base titration characteristic gain is higher at about pH7, but is lower at either end of
it.
In contrast, non-linear PID control has a gain characteristic inverse to the acid base
titration characteristic, enabling constant closed loop gain to be obtained over a wide
range. Thus, non-linear PID control achieves stable control.
Liquid to be
controlled Neutralization
solution

pH
transmitter
pH7
(SV)
PV PV
Time Time
Neutralization control
0176E.ai
Neutralization Control
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-119
Setting Details
Title
CNT1, CNT2 Control type PID, PD Tuning Display > Engineering
Control operation Display > [CONFIG2] (Configuration
ALG1, ALG2 PI-D, I-PD, SVF Display 2)
formula
mode.
► For PD setpoint: see 1.2.4, Performing Stable Control in Which a Setpoint is not Exceeded
(Proportional (PD) Control), in this manual.

Non-linear control gap Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting
GW1, GW2 0.0 to 100.0%
width Display 1) or [PID2] (PID Setting
GG1, GG2 Non-linear control gain 0.000 to 1.000 Display 2)
The GW2 and GG2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable
mode.
1-120 IM 01B08B02-02EN
1.2.8 Performing Control Canceling out Disturbance (Feedforward Control) 1
Control Function
Description
Using only the feedback control results in a delay in recovery of the control target to
normal status because corrective action occurs only when the effects of disturbance
appear on a process variable (PV).
If disturbance can be measured, a correction signal with respect to the disturbance
can be applied in advance to the controller’s manipulated output (MV) to cancel out the
disturbance before it affects the control target.
This is called feedforward control or feedforward compensation. It is generally used in
combination with feedback control.
Operation description
The multi-function mode provides parameters that perform gain operation (feedforward
gain (FGN)) and bias operation (feedforward input bias (FBI) and feedforward output bias
(FBO)) for a disturbance measurement input signal (feedforward input (FIN)).
The loop 1’s manipulated output variable (MV) in the single-loop mode (SINGLE) or
cascade mode (CAS) is:
MV=MVc+FF
 1 
MV=FGN •FIN+FBI  +FBO

 1+FLG•S 
0177E.ai
where MV: manipulated output, MVc: feedback control’s manipulated output, S: Laplacian operator,
FIN: feedforward input, and FLG: feedforward first-order lag time constant
Feedforward input (FIN) is 1 to 5 V / 0 to 100%.
D
Principle of feedforward control
FIN
YS1700
YS1500 Gf Gd

FF
SV – – +
PID Gp
MVc + MV +
+ Control target
PV
0178E.ai
Legend MVc: manipulated output before feedforward compensation, SV: setpoint, PV: process
variable, D: disturbance, FF: feedforward input value, FIN: feedforward input, Gf: feedforward
element with respect to disturbance (D), Gp: process transfer function (control target), Gd: transfer
function with respect to the process variable (PV) of disturbance (D)

PV=(MVc–Gf•D)Gp+Gd•D=MVc•Gp+(Gd–Gf•Gp)D
0179E.ai
Holding Gf = Gd/Gp enables compensation of the effects of disturbance (D).
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-121
Examples of usage
(1) Improving heat exchanger controllability
For simple heat exchanger control, the addition of feedforward control enables
compensation to be made for variations in the inflow rate.
Improvement in heat exchanger controllability
YS1700
TIC YS1500
+ +
Gf

Temperature
Heating medium
Heat exchanger
Product
Inflow rate (feedforward signal)

0180E.ai
Heat Exchanger Control
(2) Neutralization control

Neutralization control is difficult to achieve due to long reaction times. However,
the addition of feedforward control enables variations in the flow rate of processing
water, and compensation of its composition (pH value).
Neutralization control
YS1700 SV PV
YS1500
Non-linear
PID control
Gain and + +
bias

Inflow rate
(FF signal)
Neutralizer
pH transmitter
0181E.ai
Neutralization Control
1-122 IM 01B08B02-02EN
1
Setting Details
Control Function
CNT1, CNT2 Control type PID, PD
formula
mode.
► For PD setpoint: see 1.2.4, Performing Stable Control in Which a Setpoint is not Exceeded
(Proportional (PD) Control), in this manual.

Title
Feedforward gain
FSW Tuning Display > Engineering
operation OFF: Not used
Display > [CONFIG3] (Configuration
Addition of feedforward ON: Used Display 3)
FON
output
Display Transition and

Display Title
Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID
FF1 Feedforward input value 1 −100.0 to 200.0%
Setting Display 1)
FGN Feedforward gain −8.000 to 8.000
Tuning Display >
FBI Feedforward input bias −106.3 to 106.3% [PARAMETER]
FBO Feedforward output bias −800.0 to 800.0% (PARAMETER Setting
Display)
FLG Feedforward lag time constant 0.0 to 800.0 sec
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-123
1.2.9 Controlling a Process with Long Dead Time (Sample-and-hold PI Control)
Description
Sample-and-hold PI control (S-PI) performs PI control for a sample PI sampled
time (STMn) only during the first sample-and-hold PI control time span (SWDn). It
subsequently holds a manipulated output variable (MV) when that time elapses.
This control is useful for processes with long dead times where the results of the
manipulated output variable (MV) are not quickly reflected on the process variable (PV).
It is also provided with non-linear PID control function.
SV
PV
Integral action
PB + TI
MV Output held
Output held
Time
SWD
STM STM
↑
Point A (where control starts)
0182E.ai
Legend MV: manipulated output variable, SV: setpoint, and PV: process variable
Action of Sample-and-hold PI Control (S-PI)
To reduce overshoots, it is better to lengthen the sample PI sampled time (STM). This
results however in the settling time becoming longer.
If the shortest cycle (TN) of the main disturbance imposed on process is smaller than
the sample PI sampled time (STM), that disturbance cannot be controlled. A guideline is
approximately STM ≤ TN/5.
The table below shows the operation resulting when the operation mode is switched.
Operation Mode Transition Operation in Each Operation Mode

(C)(CAS) → (A) Performs control continuing the sample PI sampled time (STM).
(C)(CAS) → (M) Resets sample PI sampled time (STM).
(C)(CMP)(SPC) → – Changes the operation mode in the same way as in the (CAS)
mode.
(C)(CMP)(DDC) → –
In cases where the (C) mode is not used, to prevent inadvertent
(C) → – operation the operation mode does not change even if the “C”
mode key is pressed.
(A) → (C) Starts control from point A in the figure above.
(A) → (M) Resets sample PI sampled time (STM).
Switching directly from (M) to (C) is not possible. (In this case,
(M) → (C) change the mode to (A) and then switch from (A) to (C)).
It is, however, possible in the (DDC) mode.
(M) → (A) Starts control from point A in the figure above.
* If the sample PI sampled time (STNn) or sample-and-hold PI control time span (SWDn)
is changed, sample-and-hold PI control immediately switches to the changed value and
continues operation.
* For the meaning of the (M), (A), (C), (CAS), (CMP), (SPC), and (DDC) symbols, see 1.1,
Selecting the Controller Mode (CTL).
1-124 IM 01B08B02-02EN
1
Setting Details
Control Function
CNT1, CNT2 Control type S-PI
formula
mode.

Sample PI sampled Tuning Display > Engineering Display >
STM1, STM2 0 to 9999 sec.
time [SMPL & BATCH] (Sample & Batch Setting
Sample-and-hold PI Display) or [SMPL] (Sample Setting
SWD1, SWD2 0 to 9999 sec. Display)
control time span
The STM2 and SWD2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, or programmable mode.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-125
1.2.10 Performing Control with Rapidly Settling Setpoints (Batch PID Control
(YS1700 Programmable Mode Only))
Description
Batch PID control is useful for cases where control is performed causing the PV to settle
to a setpoint (SV) as quickly as possible without overshooting.
If a deviation (E) exceeding a batch PID deviation setting value (BD) occurs, the
controller outputs the high limit setpoint of MV (MH) to quickly bring the process variable
(PV) to the setpoint (SV). In the case of reverse action, if a deviation (E) falls within the
batch PID deviation setting value (BD), the controller determines that the process is in a
steady state and changes to PID control.
Upon changing to PID control, the controller starts to output from
MV = MH − BB
to avoid an overshoot in the process variable (PV).
where batch PID bias (BB): Amount of output pulled back
If the deviation (E) exceeds the batch PID deviation setting value (BD) after the controller
has switched to PID control, no high limit setpoint of MV (MH) will be output unless the
deviation exceeds the batch PID lock-up width (BL).
Moreover, in the case of direct action, the controller outputs the low limit setpoint of MV
(ML) instead of the high limit setpoint of MV (MH), making the batch PID bias (BB) act in
the positive direction.
SV
BD BL BD
PV
MH
BB BB
MH
MV MH output PID control output output
(M) (A) Time
Start of batch PID control Occurrence of disturbance

0183E.ai
Legend MV: manipulated output variable, MH: high limit setpoint of MV, SV: setpoint, and PV:
process variable
Action of Batch PID Control (BATCH)
Setting Details

CNT1, CNT2 Control type BATCH
formula
1-126 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Parameter Name Setting Range Display Transition and Display Title 1

Batch PID deviation
BD1, BD2 0.0 to 100.0% Tuning Display > Engineering Display
setting value
Control Function
> [SMPL & BATCH] (Sample & Batch
BB1, BB2 Batch PID bias 0.0 to 100.0% Setting Display) or [SMPL] (Sample
BL1, BL2 Batch PID lock-up width 0.0 to 100.0% Setting Display)
1.2.11 Performing Control Switching Multiple PID Parameters (Preset PID

(YS1700 Programmable Mode Only))
Description
In preset PID, eight sets of PID parameters are set in advance to the preset PID table.
PID parameters meeting the process conditions are selected from these parameters
using user programs which are set to two control elements.
► For user programs: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable Function User’s
Manual.
Setting Details

CNT1, CNT2 Control type PID, S-PI, BATCH, PD
formula
mode.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 1-127
Blank Page
Chapter 2 Auxiliary Control Function
2.1 Compensating or Computing Process

Variables (Multi-function Mode Only)
2.1.1 Input Filter (First-order Lag Operation) 2
Auxiliary Control Function

Description
First-order lag operation is performed on each analog input. This function is used if there
are significant variations in the display value such as the presence of noise. The greater
the time constant, the stronger the filtering function.
Input Example of filtering Example of filtering
for 2 seconds for 10 seconds
0201E.ai
Setting Details
Display Title
PLG1, PLG2 First-order lag time constant for PV 0.0 to 800.0 sec
Tuning Display >
CLG1, CLG2 First-order lag time constant for CSV 0.0 to 800.0 sec
[PARAMETER]
FLG (*1) Feedforward lag time constant 0.0 to 800.0 sec (Parameter Setting
Display)
TLG Tracking input lag time constant 0.0 to 800.0 sec
*1: Available in the loop 1 in the single-loop mode or cascade mode.
The PLG2 and CLG2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade or selector mode.
2.1.2 Square Root Extraction (Low Cutoff Adjustable)
Description
Square root extraction is performed on a process variable (PV) and cascade setting
value (CSV). The input and output characteristics are that input = output at the low cutoff
point or below. There is no hysteresis.
Output
Low cutoff adjustable

Output = input Input
0202E.ai
Square Root Extraction Characteristics
IM 01B08B02-02EN 2-1
2.1 Compensating or Computing Process Variables (Multi-function Mode Only)
Setting Details

OFF: Without square root extraction Tuning Display > Engineering Display >
PSR1, PSR2 Square root extraction for PV
ON: With square root extraction [CONFIG3] (Configuration Display 3)
Square root extraction low Tuning Display > [PARAMETER]
PLC1, PLC2 0.0 to 100.0%
cutoff setpoint for PV (Parameter Setting Display)
Square root extraction for OFF: Without square root extraction Tuning Display > Engineering Display >
CSR1, CSR2
CSV ON: With square root extraction [CONFIG3] (Configuration Display 3)
Square root extraction low Tuning Display > [PARAMETER]
CLC1, CLC2 0.0 to 100.0%
cutoff setpoint for CSV (Parameter Setting Display)
The PSR2, PLC2, CSR2, and CLC2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade,
selector, or programmable mode.
2.1.3 10-segment Linearizer Function

Description
Non-linear process variables (PV) can be linearized by 10-segment linearizer function
conversion. Output can be arbitrarily set to each of 10 equally divided points between 0.0
to 100.0% input (process variable (PV)).
For input (process variable (PV)) ≤ 0%, conversion is made by the extension
characteristic of the 0 to 10% section line segment. For 100% ≤ input (process variable
(PV)) < 106.3%, conversion is made by the extension characteristic of the 90 to 100%
section line segment.
Input (process variable (PV)) will be limited to between −6.3 to 106.3%.
100% setpoint
90% setpoint
......

30% setpoint
20% setpoint ......
10% setpoint
%
-6.3 0 10 20 30 90 100 106.3
0203E.ai
10-segment Linearizer Function Conversion
Setting Details

OFF: Without 10-
segment linearizer
10-segment linearizer Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [CONFIG3]
FX1, FX2 function
function for PV (Configuration Display 3)
ON: With 10-segment
linearizer function
101 to 111 Tuning Display > Engineering Display > [FX TABLE]
10-segment function table 0.000 to 1.000
201 to 211 (FX Table Setting Display)
The FX2 and 201 to 211 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or
programmable mode.
2-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN
2.1 Compensating or Computing Process Variables (Multi-function Mode Only)
2.1.4 Ratio Operation
Description 2
Ratio operation can be performed for cascade setting value (CSV) using the following
operation formula.

CSV=CGN(CIN+CBI)+CBO
0204E.ai
where CSV: cascade setting value, CIN: cascade setting input

If ratio operation is performed, control operation is carried out with the operation results
(cascade setting value (CSV)) as the setpoint (SV).
Setting Details
Display Title
OFF: Without ratio Tuning Display >
operation Engineering Display >
CSW1, CSW2 Ratio operation for CSV
ON: With ratio [CONFIG3] (Configuration
operation Display 3)
CGN1, CGN2 Ratio gain for CSV −8.000 to 8.000
Tuning Display >
CBI1, CBI2 Ratio input bias for CSV −106.3 to 106.3% [PARAMETER] (Parameter
Setting Display)
CBO1, CBO2 Ratio output bias for CSV −800.0 to 800.0%
The CSW2, CGN2, CBI2, and CBO2 parameters are used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or
programmable mode.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 2-3
2.2 Using the Tracking Function (Multi-function
Mode Only)
2.2.1 Output Tracking
Description
Output tracking is the function of switching the manipulated output (MV) from the control
operation output performed in the controller to a tracking input (X3) signal.
When a digital input (DI) signal is received in automatic control (A) or cascade setting
automatic control (C) status, the manipulated output variable (MV) is changed to a
tracking input value (X3).
Moreover, switching from control operation output to a tracking input (X3) occurs
immediately, while switching from a tracking input (X3) to control operation output
occurs beginning with the tracking input (X3) value during switching. Thus, switching is
bumpless.
A tracking input (X3) signal in the multi-function mode is an input from the X3 terminal
that has been filtered (tracking input lag time constant (TLG)).
Switching operation is performed based on a digital input (DI) signal. The “A” and “C”
lamp lighting status does not change. Moreover, [EXT-TRK] is displayed on the LOOP
Display’s or METER Display’s control status display section (it does not appear in manual
control (M)).
In the cascade and selector modes, tracking input is an input from the X4 or X6 terminal.
For this, see 1.1.2, Control in the Cascade Mode (CTL = CAS) or 1.1.3, Control in the
Selector Mode (CTL = SELECT), in this manual.
Example of usage:
Constant blast volume and constant blast pressure control of a blast furnace blower can
be bumplessly switched bidirectionally using two controllers as shown below.
Hot stove Blast furnace
Flow rate
Pressure
PIC FIC
Turbine Blower
Air
Steam
0205E.ai
Blast Furnace Blower Control
Setting Details
Parameter Name Display Range
Title
Output tracking input Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID
TRK1 −6.3 to 106.3%
value 1 Setting Display 1)
2-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN
2.2 Using the Tracking Function (Multi-function Mode Only)
2.2.2 Cascade Setting Value Tracking (Single-loop Mode Only)
Description 2
When the operation mode is switched to manual control (M), the controller’s internal
setpoint tracks a cascade setting value (CSV).

When cascade setting automatic control (C) is switched to automatic control (A), or from
manual control (M) to automatic control (A), the setpoint (SV) tracks a cascade setting
value (CSV).
CSV PV
TRKSW=SVTRK
SV key TRKSW=–
(A)
(C) (M)

SV PV
PID
MV key
(C),(A) < >
(M)
MV
0206E.ai
Cascade Setting Value Tracking (SVTRK)
Setting Details
Display Title
Selection Tuning Display > Engineering
−: Without tracking function
TRKSW of tracking Display > [CONFIG3]
SVTRK: SV tracking
function (Configuration Display 3)
Cascade setting Equivalent to −6.3 to 106.3% Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID
CSV1
value in the engineering unit Setting Display 1)
IM 01B08B02-02EN 2-5
2.2 Using the Tracking Function (Multi-function Mode Only)
2.2.3 Process Variable Tracking (Single-loop Mode Only)
Description
When manual control (M) is switched to automatic control (A), if a deviation (E) becomes
large, variations in the manipulated output (MV) also become significant (especially, in
the case of PV derivative PID (PI-D) control).
To prevent this, the setpoint (SV) should be matched with the process variable (PV)
during manual control (M), so that an abrupt adjustment action does not occur when the
operation mode is switched to automatic control (A).
When the operation mode is switched from manual control (M) to automatic control (A), a
setpoint (SV) tracks the process variable (PV).
CSV PV
TRKSW=– TRKSW=PVTRK
SV key
(A)
(C) (M)

SV PV
PID
MV key
(C),(A)
< >
(M)
0207E.ai
Process Variable Tracking (PVTRK)
Setting Details
Title
Selection Tuning Display > Engineering
−: Without tracking function
TRKSW of tracking Display > [CONFIG3]
PVTRK: PV tracking
function (Configuration Display 3)
2-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN
2.3 Changing the Control Operation Direction and
Valve Direction
2
Description

The control operation direction is as shown below:
Manipulated output
100 %
Reverse action Direct action

– +
0 % Deviation
(PV – SV)
0208E.ai
The valve direction determines “C – O” or “O – C” displayed on the LCD.

If the control operation direction is reverse action, the manipulated output variable
increases when PV < SV, and decreases when PV > SV.
If the control operation direction is direct action, the manipulated output variable acts
conversely.
Setting Details
Title
Control operation RVS: Reverse action
ACT1, ACT2
direction DIR: Direct action
C–O: MV Tuning Display > Engineering
0% = C Display > [CONFIG2]
100% = O (Configuration Display 2)
VDIR1, VDIR2 Valve direction
O–C: MV
0% = O
100% = C
The ACT2 parameter is used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.
The VDIR2 parameter is used for the loop 2 in the programmable mode.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 2-7
2.4 Using Preset MV
Description
When receiving a digital input signal in the automatic control or cascade control status,
YS1000 outputs a preset output value that is set in advance to a manipulated output.
Manual operation is not available. When the digital input signal is cleared, operation
returns to the original condition. In the preset MV output status, [EXT-PMV] is displayed
on the LOOP or METER Display. The “A” and “C” mode key lamp statuses do not
change.
Preset output can be set to 0% or below for use in an emergency shutdown in the event
of process abnormality, etc.
Setting Details

Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID Setting
PMV1, PMV2 Preset output −6.3 to 106.3% Display 1) or [PID2] (PID Setting
Display 2)
The PMV2 parameter is used for the loop 2 in the programmable mode.
2-8 IM 01B08B02-02EN
2.5 Using the Event Function
2.5.1 Displaying Messages (Event Display Function (Settable Only in YSS1000) 2

Description
The event display function displays a message (in Japanese, English, or Chinese) on the
Operation Display if an event such as an abnormality occurs, providing guidance for the
operator. A maximum of five events can be set using the YSS1000 Setting Software (sold
separately). Events will be displayed on all Operation Displays. The display area is 200 ×
80 dots, with 50 × 80 dots of that used to display a clearing guide.
If multiple events occur simultaneously, they are displayed in an overlaid condition. The
order of priority is (high) event 1 > 2 > 3 > 4 > 5 (low), and the event with the highest
priority is displayed on top. The event being displayed can be cleared by pressing and
holding the SHIFT key for three seconds. Moreover, events can be redisplayed on Alarm
Display.
► For how to redisplay events: see “Monitoring and Operating the Alarm Display” in the YS1500
Indicating Controller/YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide.
Events are overlaid for

display if multiple events
occur simultaneously.
Set using the YSS1000
Setting Software

Clearing guide display

(fixed display)
0209E.ai
Only foreground event

is cleared.
SHIFT SHIFT
Press and hold Press and hold

the SHIFT key the SHIFT key
for three for three
seconds seconds
0210E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 2-9
Event flag
The status register is the flag to indicate an event. An event is displayed if the status
register changes from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0.
Process alarm such as a high limit alarm and operation mode can be registered as a flag.
Simulation Display
After downloading the event display dada from YSS1000, the event can be displayed
forcibly. Simulation display can be set when operation is stopped.
To cancel simulation display:
(1) Turn OFF simulation display on YSS1000.
(2) Change the operation stop status from stopped to operating.
(3) Turn the power supply OFF and then ON.
Deletion Guide Display Language
English
0211E-01.ai
2-10 IM 01B08B02-02EN
2.5.2 Changing the PV Bar Display Color in the Event of a Process Alarm (Active
Color Display Function)
2
Description
The active color display function changes the colors of the PV bar on the LOOP Display

to red to inform the operator of instrument abnormality. Active color display can be set on
a loop basis and items can be selected from each loop’s process alarms (see the table
below).
Occurrence of
event
Loop 1
active display
0211E.ai
Setting Details
Display Title
OFF: Without active display function
(default)
PH1: High limit alarm for PV 1
PL1: Low limit alarm for PV 1
Active color HH1: High-high limit alarm for PV 1
ACTD1 display LL1: Low-low limit alarm for PV 1
selection 1 DL1: Deviation-1 alarm
VL1: Velocity alarm for PV 1
DL1VL1: Deviation 1 alarm or velocity
alarm for PV1 Tuning Display >
1-ALM: Logical OR of all loop 1 alarms Engineering Display >
OFF: Without active display function [DISPLAY] (Setting Display
(default) for Operation Display)
PH2: High limit alarm for PV 2
PL2: Low limit alarm for PV 2
Active color HH2: High-high limit alarm for PV 2
ACTD2 display LL2: Low-low limit alarm for PV 2
selection 2 DL2: Deviation 2 alarm
VL2: Velocity alarm for PV 2
DL2VL2: Deviation 2 alarm or velocity
alarm for PV 2
2-ALM: Logical OR of all loop 2 alarms
The ACTD2 parameter is used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable mode.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 2-11
2.5.3 Operator Notification Using Tag Number Display (Alternate Tag Number
Color Display Function)
Description
In the event of an ALM lamp lighting, the alternate tag number color display function
notifies the operator of instrument abnormality by alternating the color of the tag number
background and red.
► For lighting of ALM lamp: see “How to Take Actions if the ALM Lamp or FAIL Lamp Lights up ” in
the YS1500 Indicating Controller/YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide.
Alternate tag
number color display
Event
occurrence
0212E.ai
Setting Details

Color Tuning Display > Engineering Display
OFF: Disabled
TAGAL inversion of > [DISPLAY] (Setting Display for
ON: Enabled
tag number Operation Display)
2-12 IM 01B08B02-02EN
2.6 Setting the Alarm Function
Selecting the multi-function mode (from among single-loop, cascade, or selector mode) 2
allows an alarm function to be automatically assigned to digital outputs.
► For digital output function in the multi-function mode: see 1.1.1, Control in the Single-loop Mode,

1.1.2, Control in the Cascade Mode, and 1.1.3, Control in the Selector Mode, in this manual.
► For setting the alarm function: see 3.1.5, Change the Digital Output Functions, in this manual.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 2-13
2.7 Setting Alarm Output Hysteresis
Description
The HYS1 parameter operates in common on alarms in the loop 1, while the HYS2
parameter operates in common on alarms in the loop 2.
Setting hysteresis (differential gap) to alarm action prevents chattering in digital output.
High limit alarm output for PV Open Closed
High limit alarm setpoint for PV

Alarm hysteresis (HYSn)
PV
Alarm hysteresis (HYSn)

Low limit alarm setpoint for PV
Low limit alarm output for PV Closed Open
Time
For an example in the figure above, the contact type is such that the contact
opens if an event occurs (factory default).
0213E.ai
Setting Details
Title
Engineering unit
Tuning Display > [PID1] (PID
equivalent to
HYS1, HYS2 Alarm hysteresis Setting Display 1) or [PID2] (PID
between 0.0 to
Setting Display 2)
20.0%
The HYS2 parameter is used for the loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable
mode.

2-14 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Chapter 3 Auxiliary Input and Output Functions
3.1 Defining Digital Input and Output Functions

(Multi-function Mode Only)
The digital input (DI) terminals and digital output (DO) terminals of the YS1000 are
shared. The expandable I/O terminal of the basic type of YS1700 (with expandable I/O)
is dedicated terminal.
When the multi-function mode (single loop, cascade, or selector mode) is selected, 3
functions are automatically assigned to the digital input and output terminals. Functions
can be assigned as needed to any terminals not provided with a function.
Auxiliary Input and Output Functions

► For digital input and output functions in the multi-function mode: see “Installation and Wiring” in
the YS1500 Indicating Controller/YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide
or Chapter 1, Control Function, in this manual.
Change functions of
digital input and
output terminals
Determine whether to
use the terminals as See 3.1.1.
DI or DO
Determine See 3.1.2 for using them as DI.

contact types See 3.1.3 for using them as DO.
See 3.1.4 for using them as DI.

Determine functions
See 3.1.5 for using them as DO.
End
0301E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 3-1
3.1 Defining Digital Input and Output Functions (Multi-function Mode Only)
3.1.1 Switching Digital Terminals between Input and Output
Description
The table below shows YS1000’s digital input and output terminal numbers and the
target parameters. Setting DI to a parameter enables the terminals concerned to be used
as digital input; setting DO to a parameter enables them to be used as digital output.
► For factory defaults of digital inputs and outputs: see “Installation and Wiring” in the YS1500
Indicating Controller/YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide
Terminal
Application Parameter Factory Default
Numbers
Nos. 38 – 39 Used as DI1 or DO6. DIO16 DI (used as DI1)
Nos. 36 – 37 Used as DI2 or DO5. DIO25 DO (used as DO5)
Setting Details
Display Title
DIO16 DI1/DO6 Specification
Tuning Display >
DIO34 DI3/DO4 Specification DI: Used as digital input Engineering Display >
DIO43 DI4/DO3 Specification DO: Used as digital output [DI/DO]
(DI/DO Setting Display)
3.1.2 Switching Digital Input Contact Type
Description
Operation according to the opening/closing of digital input contacts is as shown below. If
the computer cascade setting mode (SPC mode or DDC mode) has been activated, the
operation mode cannot be switched by digital input.
Setpoint Operation
The operation mode changes to the one specified if digital input is switched from
OPN “Close” to “Open.” The operation mode is assigned as described in 3.1.4 Changing
Digital Input Functions.
CLS Operation is the reverse of the above.
3-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Setting Details
Display Title
DI1D DI1 contact type
OPN: Function is enabled 3
DI4D DI4 contact type if the contact
Tuning Display >
DI5D DI5 contact type concerned is open
Engineering Display >

(factory default).
DI6D DI6 contact type [DI/DO]
CLS: Function is enabled
DI7D DI7 contact type (*1) if the contact
concerned is closed.
DI8D DI8 contact type (*1)
*1: DI7D, DI8D, DI9D, and DI10D are available only when using the YS1700 basic type (with
expandable I/O).
3.1.3 Switching Digital Output Contact Type

Description
The opening/closing action of the digital output is as shown below.
Setpoint Operation
Digital output changes from “Close” to “Open” if an event occurs. Each event is
OPN
assigned as described in 3.1.5 Changing Digital Output Functions.
CLS Operation is the reverse of the above.
Setting Details
Display Title
DO1D DO1 contact type
OPN: The contact
DO4D DO4 contact type concerned opens if
Tuning Display >
DO5D DO5 contact type an event occurs
CLS: The contact
DO6D DO6 contact type [DI/DO]
concerned closes if
DO7D DO7 contact type (*1) an event occurs.
(*2)
DO8D DO8 contact type (*1)
*1: DO7D, DO8D, DO9D, and DO10D are available only when using the YS1700 basic type (with
expandable I/O).
*2: Factory default
DO1D to DO3D : OPN
DO4D to DO5D : CLS
DO6D to DO10D : OPN
IM 01B08B02-02EN 3-3
3.1.4 Changing Digital Input Functions
Description
The following describes digital input operations. The operation described below is the
case where the digital input contact type is open (OPN). To use reverse operation,
change the contact type from open (OPN) to close (CLS). The factory default has no
functions assigned to the digital inputs.
► For contact type: see 3.1.2 Switching Digital Input Contact Type, in this manual.
(1) Automatic switching (E-AUT)

YS1000 changes to automatic control when a digital input signal is received in the
cascade setting automatic control. During transition to automatic control, [EXT-AUT] is
displayed on the Operation Display. The “C” lamp remains lit . The “A” lamp blinks. When
the digital input signal is cleared, the YS1000 returns to the original cascade setting
automatic control.
Automatic switching (E-AUT) cannot be simultaneously used.
When the parameter CMOD1 is set to CMP, Automatic switching (E-AUT) cannot be
used.
Digital (Voltage Level) Input

Function Operation Mode
Contact Close (Low) Contact Open (High)
Setpoint Cascade setpoint Local setpoint
C Operation status Automatic control
Automatic
switching Status display No display [EXT-AUT]
(E-AUT)
A Always automatic control
M Always manual control
(2) Manual switching (E-MAN)

YS1000 changes to manual control when a digital input signal is received in the
automatic control or cascade setting automatic control status. During transition to manual
control, [EXT-MAN] is displayed on the Operation Display. The “A” or “C” lamps remain
lit. The “M” lamp blinks. When the digital input signal is cleared, the YS1000 returns to
the original operation mode.
Manual switching (E-MAN) cannot be simultaneously used.
When the parameter CMOD1 is set to CMP, manual switching (E-MAN) cannot be used.

Setpoint Cascade setpoint Local setpoint
C Operation status Automatic control Manual control
Status display No display [EXT-MAN]
Manual switching
Setpoint Local setpoint
(E-MAN)
A Operation status Automatic control Manual control
Status display No display [EXT-MAN]
3-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(3) Preset MV switching (E-PMV)

YS1000 outputs a preset MV value to a manipulated output variable when a digital input
signal is received in the automatic control or cascade setting automatic control status.
Manual operation is not possible (to do manual operation, it is necessary to switch to
manual control.) When the digital input signal is cleared, the YS1000 returns to the
original automatic control or cascade setting automatic control. In the preset MV output
condition, [EXT-PMV] is displayed on the Operation Display. The “A” or “C” lamps remain
lit . The preset MV value can be set to 0% or less to be used for emergency shutdown in
3
the event of a process abnormality, etc. Preset MV is limited to the output limiter.
► For preset MV: see 2.4 Using Preset MV, in this manual.

Setpoint Cascade setpoint
C Operation status Automatic control A preset MV is output.
Status display No display [EXT-PMV]
Preset MV
switching Setpoint Local setpoint
(E-PMV)
A Operation status Automatic control A preset MV is output.
Status display No display [EXT-PMV]
(4) Output tracking switching (E-TRK)

YS1000 functions in the same way as in the case of a preset MV. However, the MV value
output at switching is an external analog input value.
► For output tracking: see 2.2.1 Output Tracking, in this manual.

Setpoint Cascade setpoint
C Operation status Automatic control Output tracking
Status display No display [EXT-TRK]
Output tracking
switching Setpoint Local setpoint
(E-TRK)
A Operation status Automatic control Output tracking
Status display No display [EXT-TRK]
(5) Output preset and manual switching (TR-MPMV)

YS1000 simultaneously changes to “preset MV switching” and “manual switching”
operations when a digital input signal is received in automatic control or cascade setting
automatic control. Output preset and manual switching (TR-MPMV) is not operate in the
manual control. Preset MV is limited to the output limiter.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 3-5
(6) Self-tuning switching (E-STC)

When the digital input signal is received, the self-tuning function works according to the
STC mode selection parameter (STC). YS1000 stops the self-tuning function when a
digital input signal is cleared.
► For self-tuning function: see Chapter 7, Self-tuning Function, in this manual.

Function
Self-tuning switching (E-STC) STC function stopped STC function started
(7) Cascade open/close switching (E-O/C)

Cascade open/close switching is available in the cascade mode. When a digital
input signal is received, YS1000 enters the (internal) cascade open status (loop 1
disconnected), activating loop 2 control. When the digital input signal is cleared, the
YS1000 enters the (internal) cascade close status. [OPEN] or [CLOSE] is displayed on
the Operation Display, indicating the open/close status.

Function
Open/close switching (E-O/C) (Internal) cascade close (Internal) cascade open
(8) Loop 2 local/remote switching (E-L/R)

Loop 2 remote/local switching is available in the selector mode.
When a digital input signal is received, loop 2’s setpoint is switched to Local. When the
digital input signal is cleared, loop 2’s setpoint changes to Remote, using an external
cascade setpoint. In this case, [SV2-LCL] or [SV2-RMT] indicating the local/remote
status of loop 2’s setpoint is displayed on the Operation Display.

Function
Local/remote switching (E-L/R) Remote Local
(9) Selector selection (E-SEL)

When a digital input signal is received, loop 1’s computation results are output. When the
digital input signal is cleared, the computation results are output according to the ATSEL
autoselector selection parameter.

Function
Loop 1’s computation results
Selector selection (E-SEL) Autoselector selection
are selected.
3-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(10) LCD backlight off (LCD-OFF)

When a digital input signal is switched from "Close" to "Open", YS1000 turns off the LCD
backlight (if contact type is open (OPN)). When the digital input signal is switched from
"Open" to "Close", the LCD backlight turns on.
If any front panel key is pressed once while the LCD backlight is OFF, it will be turned
ON again.
(11) Manual switching (TR-MAN), automatic switching (TR-AUT), and

3
cascade switching (TR-CAS)

In automatic switching (E-AUT) or manual switching (E-MAN), operation switches
according to the status (open or close status). However, manual switching (TR-MAN),
automatic switching (TR-AUT), or cascade switching (TR-CAS) functions when a digital
input signal changes from open to close or from close to open.
When the controller mode is cascade or selector mode, loop1's mode is changed.
(12) Output loop selection (E-LPSEL)

When the digital input signal (DI) is "Open", the computation results of Loop 2 are output.
When the digital input signal (DI) is "Close", the computation results of Loop 1 are output.
(When the contact type is OPN)
The auto selector does not operate.

Function
Output loop selection Loop 1’s computation results Loop 2’s computation results
(E-LPSEL) are selected. are selected.
(13) All event elimination (TR-EVT.C)

When a digital input signal (DI) is switched from "Close" to "Open", all the displayed
events are cleared.
For all other cases, events are displayed when the display conditions are met.
After the event display is cleared, if the digital input signal (DI) remains "Open", when an
event display condition is met, the corresponding event (1 to 5) is displayed.
Type Operation Description Function

CLOSE
When a digital input signal is received, the specified E-AUT, E-MAN, E-O/C,
Status operation occurs. When the digital input signal is E-L/R, E-PMV, E-STC,
OPEN OPEN
cleared, the original condition returns. E-SEL, E-TRK
0301-01E.ai
CLOSE
When a digital input signal is received, the specified

OPEN OPEN operation occurs. TR-MAN, TR-AUT,
Trigger The digital input’s minimum detection time is the TR-CAS, TR-MPMV,
control period + 20 ms. The control period is fixed at LCD-OFF (*1)
100 ms.
Control period + 20 ms
0301-02E.ai
*1: LCD-OFF function operates by the rising edge and the falling edge.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 3-7
Setting Details
Display Title
DI1F DI1 function selection NONE: No function assigned
E-AUT: Switching to Automatic mode (status)
DI2F DI2 function selection
E-MAN: Switching to Manual mode (status)
DI3F DI3 function selection E-O/C: Open/Close switching (*2)
E-L/R: Local/Remote switching (*3)
DI4F DI4 function selection E-PMV: Preset MV switching
E-STC: STC start Tuning Display >
DI5F DI5 function selection E-SEL: Selector selection (*3) Engineering Display >
DI6F DI6 function selection TR-MPMV: Output preset and manual switching [DI/DO]
TR-MAN: Manual switching (trigger) (DI/DO Setting Display)
DI7F DI7 function selection (*1) TR-AUT: Automatic switching (trigger)
TR-CAS: Cascade switching (trigger)
DI8F DI8 function selection (*1) LCD-OFF: LCD backlight OFF
E-TRK: Output tracking
DI9F DI9 function selection (*1)
E-LPSEL: Output loop selection (*3)
DI10F DI10 function selection (*1) TR-EVT.C: All event elimination
*1: DI7F, DI8F, DI9F, and DI10F are available only when using the YS1700 basic type (with
expandable I/O).
*2: E-O/C can only be selected in the (internal) cascade mode.
*3: E-L/R, E-SEL and E-LPSEL can only be selected in the selector mode. If E-SEL is set, the
SSW parameter setting becomes invalid.
3-8 IM 01B08B02-02EN
3.1.5 Changing Digital Output Functions
Description
The following describes digital output operations. The operation described below is the
case where the digital output contact type is open (OPN). To use reverse operation,
change the contact type from open (OPN) to close (CLS). 3
► For contact types: see 3.1.3 Switching Digital Output Contact Type, in this manual.

Alarm status output
The high limit alarm for PV1 (PH1), low limit alarm for PV1 (PL1), high-high limit alarm for
PV1 (HH1), low-low limit alarm for PV1 (LL1), deviation 1 alarm (DL1), velocity alarm for
PV1 (VL1), deviation 1 alarm or velocity alarm for PV1 (DL1VL1), and logical OR of all
loop 1 alarms (1-ALM) operate in loop 1 in the single loop, cascade, or selector modes.
The high limit alarm for PV2 (PH2), the low limit alarm for PV2 (PL2), the high-high limit
alarm for PV2 (HH2), the low-low limit alarm for PV2 (LL2), the deviation 2 alarm (DL2),
the velocity alarm for PV2 (VL2), the deviation 2 alarm or velocity alarm for PV2 (DL2VL2),
and the logical OR of all loop 2 alarms (2-ALM) operate in loop 2 in the cascade or
selector modes.
The operation of each alarm is described below.
The figure below shows examples of actions of the high limit alarm for PV, the high-high
limit alarm for PV, the low limit alarm for PV, the low-low limit alarm for PV, and alarm
hysteresis.
High-high limit alarm output for PV Closed Open Closed
High limit alarm output for PV Open Closed
High-high limit alarm setpoint for PV

Alarm hysteresis (HYS)
High limit alarm setpoint for PV Alarm hysteresis (HYS)
PV

Low limit alarm setpoint for PV
Low-low limit alarm setpoint for PV
Low limit alarm output for PV Closed Open
Low-low limit alarm output for PV Closed Open
Time
For an example in the figure above, the contact type is such that the contact
opens if an event occurs (factory default).
0302E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 3-9
The figure below shows an example of the actions of a deviation alarm and alarm
hysteresis.
Deviation alarm output

Closed Open Closed Open Closed
Deviation alarm setpoint PV

Setpoint (SV)
Deviation alarm setpoint
Time
For an example in the figure above, the contact type is such that the contact opens
if an event occurs (factory default).
0303E.ai
The HYS1 alarm hysteresis operates collectively on PH1, PL1, HH1, LL1, and DL1. The
HYS2 alarm hysteresis operates collectively on PH2, PL2, HH2, LL2, and DL2.
The figure below shows an example of the actions of a velocity alarm for PV.
Velocity alarm
output for PV Closed Open Closed Open Closed
PV
Exceeds the velocity Exceeds the velocity

Time
Velocity alarm Velocity alarm

setpoint setpoint
Velocity alarm An alarm occurs if the velocity Velocity alarm

time setpoint exceeds this inclination. time setpoint
For an example in the figure above, the contact type is such that the contact opens
if an event occurs (factory default).
0304E.ai
3-10 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Operation mode status outputs in the single loop mode

The operation mode is output in two statuses:
Operation Mode Operation Mode Switching by Digital Input Status Output

(Lamps that light up) Operation Setting Operation Mode Status C, A/M Status Output C/A, M Status Output
OFF
C mode Close Close
(designation cancelled) 3
Output tracking C mode Close Close
C
Preset MV output C mode Close Close

Automatic switching A mode Close Open
Manual switching M mode Open Open
OFF
A mode Close Open
(designation cancelled)
A Output tracking A mode Close Open

Preset MV output A mode Close Open
Manual switching M mode Open Open
M Always manual control M mode Open Open
Operation mode status output in the cascade mode or selector modes
(1) C, A/M and C/A, M statuses

The table below shows the operation mode status output in the cascade and selector
modes.
Operation Mode Status Output
(Lamps That Light up) C, A/M C/A, M
C Close Close
A Close Open
M Open Open
(2) Open/close and remote/local status output

In the cascade mode, the (internal) cascade open/close status is output to digital output
3 (DO3).
In the selector mode, the remote/local status is output to digital output 3 (DO3). Both
status outputs are factory defaults.
• Open/close status output

When open, status output = open
When closed, status output = close
• Remote/local status output
When in remote control, status output = close
When in local control, status output = open
Y1 and Y3 alarm status outputs

The Y1 and Y3 current output status (OOP alarm) is output.
Function
Y1 and Y3 current output Y1 or Y3 current output is
OOP: Current output open
are nomal open
IM 01B08B02-02EN 3-11
Setting Details
Display Title
NONE: No function assigned
DO1F DO1 function selection
PH1: High limit alarm for PV1
PL1: Low limit alarm for PV1
DO2F DO2 function selection HH1: High-high limit alarm for PV1
LL1: Low-low limit alarm for PV1
DO3F DO3 function selection DL1: Alarm for deviation variable 1
VL1: Velocity alarm for PV1
DO4F DO4 function selection PH2: High limit alarm for PV2
PL2: Low limit alarm for PV2
HH2: High-high limit alarm for PV2
DO5F DO5 function selection
LL2: Low-low limit alarm for PV2 Tuning Display >
DL2: Alarm for deviation variable 2 Engineering Display >
DO6F DO6 function selection VL2: Velocity alarm for PV2 [DI/DO]
DL1VL1: DL1VL1: Alarm for deviation variable 1/ (DI/DO Setting Display)
DO7F DO7 function selection (*1) Velocity alarm for PV1
DL2VL2: DL2VL2: Alarm for deviation variable 2/
DO8F DO8 function selection (*1) Velocity alarm for PV2
DO9F DO9 function selection (*1) CAS: Cascade mode
CASAUT: Cascade or Automatic mode
O/C: Open/Close (*2)
DO10F DO10 function selection (*1) L/R: Remote/Local (*3)
OOP: Current output open
*1: DO7F, DO8F, DO9F, and DO10F are available only when using the YS1700 basic type (with
expandable I/O).
*2: O/C can only be selected in the cascade mode. Open/Close indicates connection or
disconnection of loop 1 or loop 2.
*3: L/R can only be selected in the selector mode. Remote/Local represents the switching
between loop 2’s external and internal setpoints.
3-12 IM 01B08B02-02EN
3.2 Switching Analog Output 3’s Voltage and
Current
Description
Analog output 3’s voltage/current can only be changed in the YS1700 programmable 3
mode.

Setting Details
Setting
Parameter Name Display Transition and Display Title
Range
Tuning Display >
Analog output 3’s current/ 4 to 20 mA
Y3TP Engineering Display > [CONFIG1]
voltage switching 1 to 5 V
(Configuration Display 1)
IM 01B08B02-02EN 3-13
3.3 Changing the Output Types of Analog Outputs
2, 3 and 4
Description
When the multi-function mode (single-loop, cascade, or selector mode) is selected,
functions are assigned to analog outputs 2, 3 and 4. To change an assigned function, use
the Y2S, Y3S, or Y4S parameters.
► For analog output 2, 3 and 4 functions: see “Installation and Wiring” in the YS1500 Indicating
Controller/YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller Operation Guide
Setting Details
Display Title
OFF: No function assigned

Y2S Analog output 2 selection PV1: Process variable 1
SV1: Setpoint value 1
PV2: Process variable 2
MV: Manipulated output variable Tuning Display >
X1: Analog input 1 Engineering Display >
Y3S Analog output 3 selection
X2: Analog input 2 [CONFIG1]
X3: Analog input 3 (Configuration Display 1)
X4: Analog input 4
X5: Analog input 5
X6: Analog input 6 (*1)
Analog output 4 selection
Y4S X7: Analog input 7 (*1)
(*1)
X8: Analog input 8 (*1)
*1: Displayed only when using the YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O)
3-14 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Chapter 4 Display and Security Functions
4.1 Display Function

4.1.1 Setting Visible/Invisible Status of the Operation Display
Description
There are ten types of Operation Displays. As shown in the table below, the Operation
Displays to be used are preset according to the controller mode. Displays you chose not
to display can be made invisible.
4
Controller Mode
Display and Security Functions

Operation Display Name Single-loop Programmable
Cascade Mode Selector Mode
Mode Mode
LOOP1 (LOOP 1 Display)    
LOOP2 (LOOP 2 Display) –   
MTR1 (METER 1 Display)    
MTR2 (METER 2 Display) –   
TRND1 (TREND 1 Display)    
TRND2 (TREND 2 Display) –   
TRND3 (TREND 3 Display)    
ALRM (ALARM Display)    
DUAL1 (DUAL 1 Display) –   
DUAL2 (DUAL 2 Display) –   
Legend : Visible, −: Invisible
Setting Details
LOOP1 LOOP 1 Display ON/OFF
LOOP2 LOOP 2 Display ON/OFF
MTR1 METER 1 Display ON/OFF
MTR2 METER 2 Display ON/OFF
Tuning Display >
TRND1 TREND 1 Display ON/OFF OFF: Invisible
ON: Visible
TRND2 TREND 2 Display ON/OFF [CONFIG1]
(*1)
TRND3 TREND 3 Display ON/OFF
ALARM ALARM Display ON/OFF
DUAL1 DUAL 1 Display ON/OFF
DUAL2 DUAL 2 Display ON/OFF
*1: Even if all the parameters are set to OFF, the LOOP 1 Display is always shown. Set the
TREND3 parameter to OFF if TREND Display 3 is not used.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 4-1
LOOP 1 Display LOOP 2 Display METER 1 Display METER 2 Display
0401E.ai 0402E.ai 0403E.ai 0404E.ai
TREND 1 Display TREND 2 Display TREND 3 Display ALARM Display
0405E.ai 0406E.ai 0407E.ai 0408E.ai
DUAL 1 Display DUAL 2 Display
0409E.ai 0410E.ai
4-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN
4.1.2 Setting Visible/Invisible Status of TREND Display Data
Description
TREND 1 Display displays PV1, SV1 and MV1, while TREND 2 Display shows PV2, SV2
and MV2.
PV trend, SV trend, and MV trends displayed on TREND 1 and TREND 2 Displays can
be set to be visible or invisible. It is possible to select the trends that are to be displayed,
making only the data necessary to be monitored visible on the Operation Display.

PV trend display PV pointer
SV trend display SV pointer
MV trend display MV pointer

0411E.ai
Setting Details

PV1 trend ON/OFF of TREND 1
TR1PV
Display
SV1 trend ON/OFF of TREND 1
TR1SV
Display
MV1 trend ON/OFF of TREND 1 Tuning Display >
TR1MV OFF: Invisible
Display Engineering Display >
ON: Visible
PV2 trend ON/OFF of TREND 2 [DISPLAY]
TR2PV (*1)
Display (*1) (Setting Display for Operation Display)
SV2 trend ON/OFF of TREND 2
TR2SV
Display (*1)
MV2 trend ON/OFF of TREND 2
TR2MV
Display (*1)
*1: The TR2PV, TR2SV, and TR2MV parameters are not displayed in the single loop mode.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 4-3
4.1.3 Changing the Time Span of TREND Displays
Description
The time span of trends displayed on the TREND 1, TREND 2, and TREND 3 displays
can be set.
Time span
0412E.ai
Setting Details

1M: 1 minute
TRDT1 TREND 1 Display time span 5M: 5 minutes
10M: 10 minutes Tuning Display >
30M: 30 minutes Engineering Display >
TRDT2 TREND 2 Display time span
1H: 1 hour [DISPLAY]
5H: 5 hours (Setting Display for Operation Display)
TRDT3 TREND 3 Display time span 10H: 10 hours
30H: 30 hours
*1: The TRDT2 parameter is used for loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable modes.
4-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN
4.1.4 Setting Display Data on the TREND 3 Display
Description
Display data shown on the TREND 3 Display can be set arbitrarily. A maximum of four
data items can be set. This enables the necessary data to be monitored on the Operation
Display.
TREND Display 3
4
Data selection 1 digital display of TREND 3 Display

Data selection 1 trend display of TREND 3 Display Data selection 1 pointer of TREND 3 Display
0413E.ai
Setting Details
Parameter Name Setting Range (*1) Display Transition and Display Title
OFF: None
Data selection 1 of TREND 3
TRDS1 SV1: Setpoint value 1
Display
MV1: Manipulated output
variable 1
Data selection 2 of TREND 3 MV2: Manipulated output
TRDS2
Display variable 2
Tuning Display >
X1: Input 1
X2: Input 2
[DISPLAY]
X3: Input 3
(Setting Display for Operation Display)
Data selection 3 of TREND 3 X4: Input 4
TRDS3 X5: Input 5
Display
X6: Input 6 (*2)
X7: Input 7 (*2)
X8: Input 8 (*2)
Y1: Output 1
Data selection 4 of TREND 3
TRDS4 Y2: Output 2
Display
Y3: Output 3
Y4: Output 4 (*2)
*1: X1 to X8 and Y1 to Y4 are values input to or output from the YS1000 terminal block.
*2: X6, X7, X8 and Y4 can only be selected when using the YS1700 basic type (with expandable
I/O).
IM 01B08B02-02EN 4-5
4.1.5 Changing Scale Divisions on the LOOP, TREND, and DUAL Displays
Description
The provision of scale divisions is relevant to the LOOP, TREND, and DUAL Displays.
For scale divisions on the METER Displays, see 4.1.6 Automatic Scale Divisions/Making
Scale Values More Legible on the METER Displays
Scale division
The figure on the left
is an example of four
scale divisions.
0414E.ai
Setting Details
SCDV1 Scale division 1 Tuning Display >

1, 2, 4, 5, 7, 10, 14, 20
[CONFIG2]
SCDV2 Scale division 2 (Configuration Display 2)
The SCDV2 parameter is used for loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable modes.
4-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN
4.1.6 Automatic Scale Divisions/Making Scale Values More Legible on the

METER Display
Description
For scales on the METER Displays, scale divisions are automatically provided based on
the values set to the scale between 0% and 100% values.
The number of scale divisions is from a minimum of 11 divisions to a maximum of 20
divisions.
4

0415E.ai
Scale numbers displayed on the METER Display are also automatically determined from
the scale’s 0% to 100% values in the same way as the scale divisions. To improve the
legibility of the scale numbers, they can be displayed to the power of 10.
Setting Details
10-exponential scale factor for

MTMG1 AUTO, 10^-5,10^-4, Tuning Display >
METER 1 Display
10^-3,10^-2,10^-1,10^0, Engineering Display >
10^1,10^2,10^3,10^4, [DISPLAY]
10-exponential scale factor for
MTMG2 10^5, (Setting Display for Operation Display)
METER 2 Display
The MTMG2 parameter is used for loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable modes.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 4-7
4.1.7 Selecting the Operation Display to be Displayed First at Power ON
Description
The Operation Display to be displayed first when the power is turned ON can be set. The
figure below shows an example of displaying the TREND 1 Display first.
TREND 1 Display LOOP 1 Display METER 1 Display
key key
Power ON
key
0416E.ai
Setting Details
LOOP1: LOOP 1 Display
LOOP2: LOOP 2 Display
MTR1: METER 1 Display
MTR2: METER 2 Display Tuning Display >
TRND1: TREND 1 Display Engineering Display >
FDSP Power-on initial display
TRND2: TREND 2 Display [CONFIG1]
TRND3: TREND 3 Display (Configuration Display 1)
ALARM: ALARM Display
DUAL1: DUAL 1 Display
DUAL2: DUAL 2 Display
4-8 IM 01B08B02-02EN
4.1.8 Turning the LCD Backlight ON/OFF
Description
The backlight OFF function makes it possible to turn off the LCD backlight in cases
where the YS1000 is installed in locations where the display is not usually seen or if it
desired to turn it off at night. This is an energy-saving feature that extends the life of the
display unit.
The LCD backlight can be turned ON/OFF using the following means:
(1) Front panel keys 4
(2) OFF timer setting
(3) Digital input

(4) Communication
(5) User programs
There is no priority order to the methods (1) to (5). The backlight OFF function retains the
status effected when the LCD was operated last.
Note that if the FAIL or ALM lamps are lit, or if an event is displayed, the backlight will
light up even if the backlight has been set to OFF.
(1) Front panel key

If any key is pressed once while the LCD backlight is OFF, it will be turned ON.
However, it cannot be turned OFF by keystrokes. To set the backlight condition to OFF
using keystrokes, employ method (2).
(2) OFF timer setting

With the LCD backlight OFF timer turned ON, the LCD backlight will be turned OFF
when there has been no keystroke operation for 30 minutes.
(3) Digital input

If digital input to which the backlight OFF function has been assigned changes from
open to close status, the backlight is turned OFF. If it changes from close to open
status, the backlight is turned ON.
In YS1700’s programmable mode, the backlight cannot be turned OFF by digital input.
► For assigning the backlight OFF function to digital input: see 3.1.4 Changing Digital Input
Functions, in this manual.
(4) Communication
The LCD backlight ON/OFF condition can be checked and set using a CFL flag
(communication register). Write “0” or “1” to the CFL flag through communication to (0)
to turn the backlight ON or to (1) to turn it OFF.
► For backlight OFF function through communication: see YS1000 Series Communication
Interface User’s Manual.
(5) User programs

The LCD backlight ON/OFF condition can be checked and set using a CFL flag. Write
“0” or “1” to the CFL flag using user programs, entering (0) to turn the backlight ON or (1)
to turn it OFF.
► For backlight OFF function using user programs: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700
Programmable Function User’s Manual.
Setting Details

OFF: OFF timer function
Tuning Display >
activated
ECO LCD backlight auto-off timer ON : OFF timer function
[LCD]
deactivated
(LCD Setting Display)
(Off timer: 30 min)
IM 01B08B02-02EN 4-9
4.1.9 Changing the Background and Loop Colors
Description
The background color of the Operation Display, and the color of the PV and MV bars of
the LOOP Displays and the DUAL Display can be changed.
Setting the Operation Display’s background color to black causes the color of the lettering
to be white; setting the background color to white causes the color of the lettering to be
black.
LOOP 1 Display
Background color
Loop color
0417E.ai
Setting Details

BLACK
BKCL Background color selection WHITE
BLUE Tuning Display >
LP1C Loop 1 color selection GREEN [DISPLAY]
AQUA (Setting Display for Operation Display)
PINK
LP2C Loop 2 color selection ORANGE
The LP2C parameter is used for loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or programmable modes.
4-10 IM 01B08B02-02EN
4.1.10 Adjusting LCD Brightness
Description
The brightness of the LCD can be adjusted.
The adjustment bar display shows brightness adjustment values in bar format to indicate
the current value with respect to the settable range.
Selected parameter (zoom in)

4

Selected parameter
Adjustment bar display

Color bar displays
0418E.ai
Setting Details

Tuning Display >
BRT LCD brightness adjustment 0 to 5
[LCD]
(LCD Setting Display)
IM 01B08B02-02EN 4-11
4.2 Security Function
4.2.1 Setting/Releasing Keylock
Description
Keys can be locked to prevent inadvertent operation on the Operation Display.
C/A/M key
SV key

MV key
0419E.ai
Setting Details

CAMLK Keylock for C/A/M mode change Tuning Display >
UNLOCK: Keys unlocked Engineering Display >
SVLK Keylock for SV change
LOCK: Keys locked [CONFIG1]
MVLK Keylock for MV change (Configuration Display 1)
4-12 IM 01B08B02-02EN
4.2.2 Inhibiting/Enabling Parameter Change
Description
Setpoints for the tuning parameters or engineering parameters can be locked to prevent
them from being inadvertently changed. When they are locked, the parameter setting
increase key [ ] and decrease key [ ]displays are erased from each setting display.
The password for locking them is a 4-digit numeral, which is not set at factory shipment.
When the password is not set or is cleared, [SET PASSWORD] and [UNLOCK] are
displayed. When the password is set, [ENT PASSWORD] and [LOCK] are displayed.
4
Software key function
The software key function enables the front panel’s operation keys to function as keys

displayed on the LCD display.
• [SET] software key: Password setting key
Press this key to set a password.
• [ENT] software key: Password entry/cancellation key
Press this key to cancel the password setting.
• [→] key: Cursor movement key
Moves the cursor position to the right when setting or entering a password.
• [ ] software key: Number increase key
Increases numbers. Numbers change from 0 to 9 cyclically.
• [ ] software key: Number decrease key
Decreases numbers. Numbers change from 0 to 9 cyclically.
Operating the Password Setting Display

1. Setting a password (setting a password to prevent parameter changes)
(1) Open the Password Setting Display. [SET PASSWORD] and [UNLOCK] are
displayed.
(2) Press the [SET] software key. This causes the password [0000] to appear.
(3) Using the [→] software key (digit movement) and the [ ] (increase) or [ ]
(decrease) software keys, set the password.
(4) Press the [SET] software key. This changes the password background color.
(5) Press the [SET] software key again. This erases the password, causing [ENT
PASSWORD] and [LOCK] to appear. At the instant the password is set, the [SET]
software key display is erased, replaced by the [ENT] software key instead.
2. Entering/canceling a password (entering a password to the instrument to which the

password has been set, to enable parameter changes)
(1) Open the Password Setting Display. [ENT PASSWORD] and [LOCK] are displayed.
(2) Press the [ENT] software key. This causes the password [0000] to appear.
(3) Using the [→] software key (digit movement) and the [ ] (increase) or [ ]
(decrease) software keys, enter the password that has been set.
(4) Press the [ENT] software key. This changes the password background color.
(5) Press the [ENT] software key again. This erases the password if the password
entered agrees with the one that was set, causing [SET PASSWORD] and [UNLOCK]
to appear. This brings about a status allowing parameters to be changed. If the
password entered does not agree with the one that has been set, return to step (3).
IM 01B08B02-02EN 4-13
Setting/Entry Display
Operation Display > + keys (to the Tuning Menu Display) >
SHIFT
+ keys (to the
SHIFT
Engineering Menu Display) > [PASSWORD] software key (Password Setting Display)
Password setting Password enter/cancellation
Password setting Password enter
Password enter Software key function display

Cursor movement software key
Password setting software key
Password status display
Password enter software key
Increase software key
Decease software key
0420E.ai
4-14 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Chapter 5 Adjusting Direct Inputs (Temperature/Resistance/Frequency)
5.1 List of Direct Input Specifications and Basic

Operations
In the SC Setting Display, communication with the direct input cards, optional
specifications, is made to set or adjust the input specifications.
Examples of sensor type setting, burnout setting, input zero adjustment, and span
adjustment procedures are described in sections 5.2 to 5.4. Other items are also set in
the same way. The table below shows a list of setting items.
Name Model-basis Data Display
No. Description
Display /A01 /A02 /A03 /A04 /A08
01 MODEL Model EM1*C ET5*C ER5*C ES1*C EP3*A
02 TAG NO. Tag number 16 alphanumeric characters
03
A00
SELF CHK
DISPLAY
Self-check results
Display item -- --
GOOD or ERROR
-- -- --
5
[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ]
A01 INPUT Input value [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ]mV [ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ]degC [ ][ ][ ].[ ]degC [ ][ ][ ][ ]Hz
OHM
Adjusting Direct Inputs (Temperature/Resistance/Frequency)

A02 OUTPUT Output value [ ][ ][ ].[ ]%
A03 STATUS Status FF
A04 REV NO. Revision number n.000 (n: Revision number)
B00 SET Setting item -- -- -- -- --
B01 TAG NO1 Tag number 1 8 alphanumeric characters (8 first-half characters of a tag number)
B02 TAG NO2 Tag number 2 8 alphanumeric characters (8 latter half characters of a tag number)
B03 COMMENT1 Comment 1 8 alphanumeric characters (8 first-half characters of comment)
B04 COMMENT2 Comment 2 8 alphanumeric characters (8 latter half characters of comment)
PT/JPT/
B05 INP TYPE ER5 input type -- -- PT100-90/ -- --
PT50(Note 1)
B/E/J/K/T/R/S/
B06 INP TYPE ET5 input type -- -- -- --
N
[ ][ ][ ][ ]Hz
B07 LOW CUT Low cutoff -- -- -- --
(Note 5)
[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ]
B08 RESIST ES1 total resistance -- -- -- --
OHM
Temperature unit
B09 UNIT -- degC/degF/K degC/degF/K -- --
(Note 8)
[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ] [ ][ ][ ][ ]Hz
B10 ZERO Zero point [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ]mV [ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ]degC [ ][ ][ ].[ ]degC
OHM (Note 5)
[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ] [ ][ ][ ][ ]Hz
B11 SPAN Span (Note 2) [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ]mV [ ][ ][ ][ ].[ ]degC [ ][ ][ ].[ ]degC
OHM (Note 4) (Note 5)
OFF/UP/ OFF/UP/ OFF/UP/ OFF/UP/
B12 BURN OUT Burnout --
DOWN DOWN DOWN DOWN
C00 ADJUST Adjustment item -- -- -- -- --
0% output correction
C01 OUT 0% ±10.00
(Note 7)
100% output
C02 OUT 100% ±10.00
correction (Note 7)
Burnout correction EXECUTE/ EXECUTE/
C03 WIRING R -- -- --
(Note 3) RESET RESET
[ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]
Input zero adjustment [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]mV [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]mV
C04 ZERO ADJ OHM -- --
(Note 6) RST/INC/DEC RST/INC/DEC
RST/INC/DEC
[ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]
Input span adjustment [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]mV [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]mV
C05 SPAN ADJ OHM -- --
(Note 6) RST/INC/DEC RST/INC/DEC
RST/INC/DEC
Input zero adjustment [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]
C06 ZERO ADJ -- -- -- --
(Note 6) OHM
Input span adjustment [ ][ ][ ].[ ][ ][ ]
C07 SPAN ADJ -- -- -- --
(Note 6) OHM
IM 01B08B02-02EN 5-1
5.1 List of Direct Input Specifications and Basic Operations
Note 1: PT=Pt100(IPTS-68:JIS'89), JPT=JPt100(JIS'89), PT100-90=Pt100(ITS-90:JIS'97),

PT50=Pt50(JIS'81)
Note 2: Measurable data is within the range stated in the standard specifications.
Note 3: Burnout correction is the function of correcting an error caused by the burnout current
produced if an external conductor resistance is large.
Note 4: Up to 30 kΩ is possible, but the standard specifications indicate 100 to 2000 Ω in.
Note 5: Set in four significant digits or less. However, 10000 Hz can be set for span.
Note 6: Input zero adjustment and input span adjustment are to make input adjustments of each
direct input card. /A01, /A02, and /A03 enable the adjustment of the offset and gain of the A/
D converter. Select [INC] or [DEC] using the [ ] or [ ] software keys and press the [ENT]
software key twice to make an adjustment for each selection. Also, to reset adjustments
select [RST] and press the [ENT] software key twice. Zero and span are re-set in /A04. In
other words, making a zero adjustment with an input set to 0% and a span adjustment with
the input set to 100% (pressing the [ENT] software key twice) causes the zero (B10) and
span (B11) values to be re-set automatically.
Note 7: Output correction is for adjusting the D/A converter (1 to 5 V output) of each direct input
card. 0% output correction and 100% output correction enable offset and gain to be adjusted
respectively. Set a value in the range of ±10.00% and press the [ENT] software key twice.
This causes the D/A converter to enter a status in which the set value-added 0% output
value or the 100% output value is continuously output. To exit this status, display another
parameter once on the SC Setting Display, or turn the power supply OFF and then ON.
Note 8: If optional code /DF is specified, Fahrenheit tempertature range can be used for direct input
range in addition to centigrade temperature range.
Basic Operations
1) Erroneous setting prevention function
To prevent inadvertent operation, no parameter is selected (highlight displayed)
immediately after switching to the SC Setting Display. Press the [→] software key to
select parameter [SET] (parameter setting enable/disable) from the top line of the
display.
2) Setting-enable parameter operation
[SET] on the top line is the parameter for enabling SC maintenance communication.
This parameter is in [INHB] (setting inhibited) immediately after switching to the SC
Setting Display. SC maintenance communication cannot be accomplished unless this
parameter is set to [ENBL] (setting enabled). To do so, select the [SET] parameter
and then press the [ ] software key to change the setting from [INHB] to [ENBL]. At
the same time, [STOP] appears at the upper right of the display. When the parameter
is set to [ENBL], the operation mode is forced to switch to manual control (M mode),
retaining the manipulated output and alarm output. Moreover, switching to another
display causes this parameter to return to [INHB] automatically.
3) Software keys
• [MNU] software key: Menu change key
Each time this key is pressed, YS1000 communicates with the SC to read out
and display the SC menus.
• [PRM] software key: Setting item change key
Each time this key is pressed, YS1000 communicates with the SC to read out
and display the SC setting items.
• [→] software key: Cursor movement key
When the data type is alphanumeric characters, this key moves an highlight
displayed digit to the right. In this case, should the highlight display be at the
rightmost digit, it then moves to the leftmost digit.
• [ ] software key: Data increase key
Increases data. Data changes cyclically.
• [ ] software key: Data decrease key
Decreases data. Data changes cyclically.
• [ENT] software key: Enter key
Writes data to the SC. Writing is done in the following two steps:
(1) Press the [ENT] software key once. This causes the background color of all
communication data to be highlight displayed.
5-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN
5.1 List of Direct Input Specifications and Basic Operations
(2) Press the [ENT] software key again. This writes the data to the SC card,
causing the display to return to normal display. If any key other than the [ENT]
software key is pressed, the communication data returns to normal display
without being written to the SC.
4) SC setting operation
• SC setting is made as follows:
(1) Selecting the SC menu
Press the [MNU] software key to read out and display the SC menus. Each
time the [MNU] software key is pressed, the model, tag number, and self-
check results are displayed in turn. Further pressing the [MNU] key causes
the display item, setting item, and adjustment items to be changed and
displayed cyclically.
5
Self-check results
Adjustment item
[MNU] [MNU] [MNU] [MNU] [MNU] [MNU]
Display item
Tag number
Setting item
Model

0501E.ai
(2) To select the display item, setting item, or adjustment item, further select a
setting item.
Press the [PRM] software key to read out and display the SC setting item.
Each time the [PRM] software key is pressed, the setting items are displayed
in turn. The parameters to be displayed change depending on the SC card;
see the items in the list of displayed items. Press the [PRM] software key until
the setting item you wish to set appears.
(3) Using the [→] software key (cursor movement) and the [ ] (data increase) or
[ ] (data decrease) software keys, set the setting item.
(4) Press the [ENT] software key. This causes the setting item to be highlight
displayed.
(5) Press the [ENT] software key again. This writes data to the SC card, causing
the display to return to the normal display.
Pressing any key other than the [ENT] software key causes the display to
return to the normal display without writing data.
Communication Status Display
Comment Display Status
COMMUNICATING Communicating with an SC card (normal communication)
COMMUN. ERR Communications error
OPERATION ERR Incorrect data sending
COMMAND ERR Incorrect command reception
IM 01B08B02-02EN 5-3
5.2 Setting Sensor Type
Description
The sensor type can be set as for thermocouple and RTD cards.
Setting Details
SHIFT
+ keys (to
SHIFT
the Engineering Menu Display) > [SC MAINT] software key (Input Specification Setting
Display)
Engineering Display Setting Procedure

(example of setting an RTD type)
Software key (1) Press the [→] software key to display [SET INHB]
Parameter
number function display in highlight.
Parameter Menu change key (2) Press the [ ] software key to display [SET ENBL].
name Parameter change key (3) Press the [MNU] software key to display
Data display Cursor movement key 01
Data increase key MODEL
Data decease key
ENTER key Directly input the card model (e.g., ER5*C)
(4) Press the [MNU] key several times to display
Communication B00
status display SET
(5) Press the [PRM] software key several times to
display the left display.
(6) Press the [ ] or [ ] software keys to change the
data display section.
0502E.ai
(7) Press the [ENT] software key to display the data
display section in highlight.
(8) Press the [ENT] software key again to accept the
setting.
Setting completed.
5-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN
5.3 Setting Burnout
Description
A burnout can be set as for mV input, thermocouple, RTD, and potentiometer input cards.
Setting Details
SHIFT
+ keys (to
SHIFT
Display)
Engineering Display Setting Procedure 5

(1) Press the [→] software key to display [SET INHB]

Software key in highlight.
Parameter
number
function display (2) Press the [ ] software key to display [SET ENBL].
Parameter Menu change key (3) Press the [MNU] software key to display
name Parameter change key 01
Data display Cursor movement key MODEL
Data increase key
Directly input the card model (e.g., ER5*C)
Data decease key
ENTER key (4) Press the [MNU] software key several times to
display
Communication B00
status display SET
(5) Press the [PRM] software key several times to
(6) Press the [ ] or [ ] software key to change the
0503E.ai
setting.
Setting completed.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 5-5
5.4 Making Zero and Span Adjustments of Input
Description
Zero and span adjustments of inputs can be set as for mV input, thermocouple, and RTD
cards.
Setting Details
SHIFT
+ keys (to
SHIFT
Display)
Engineering Display Setting Procedure
(1) Press the [→] software key to display [SET INHB]

in highlight.
Software key
Parameter function display (2) Press the [ ] software key to display [SET ENBL].
number (3) Press the [MNU] software key to display
Parameter Menu change key
name 01
Parameter change key
Data display Cursor movement key MODEL
Data increase key Directly input the card model (e.g., ER5*C)
Data decease key (4) Press the [MNU] key several times to display
ENTER key
C00
Communication
ADJUST
status display (5) Press the [PRM] software key several times to
(6) Press the [ ] or [ ] software keys to change the
0504E.ai
setting.
Setting completed.
5-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Chapter 6 Processing during Power Failures
6.1 Processing during Power Failures
Description
YS1000 enters a power failure status if a momentary power interruption of about 20 ms
occurs in the case of 100 V AC supply voltage, or if that of 1 ms or more occurs in the
case of 24 V DC. The operation to be taken after power is restored can be set.
Data storage
YS1000 data can be stored by making a setting with keystrokes or by making a setting
using communication through YSS1000 Setting Software. Data to be stored are the
operation mode, manipulated output variables, setpoints, setting parameters, T-register
contents (for YS1700 only), user programs, event display data, and the previous values
of dynamic operation of the user programs. Trend data displayed on a TREND Display
will be lost in the event of a power failure.
6
Operation after power restoration
The operation to be taken after power restoration depends on the duration of the power
Processing during Power Failures

failure and the operation mode that the YS1000 is in after power restoration (the start
mode (START) engineering parameter).
Power Failure Duration

Start Mode (START) Less than about 2
About 2 seconds or more
seconds
AUT HOT start
M-COLD HOT start M-COLD start
A-COLD HOT start A-COLD start
C-COLD HOT start C-COLD start
COLD HOT start COLD start
IM 01B08B02-02EN 6-1
Operation in Each Start Mode

Start Mode (START)
HOT Start M-COLD Start A-COLD Start C-COLD Start COLD Start
Same as before M mode A mode C mode Same as before
C, A, M status
power failure (LOOP 1) (LOOP 1) (LOOP 1) power failure
Same as before Same as before
DUAL type M mode A mode A mode
power failure power failure
LOOP 2’s Same as before M mode Same as before
Cascade C mode C mode
operation power failure (CLOSE) power failure
Same as before Same as before
Selector M mode (LOCAL) A mode A mode
power failure power failure
Same as before
Manipulated output variable (MV) −6.3%
power failure
Setpoint (SV) Same as before power failure
Parameters such as PID Same as before power failure
T registers (YS1700) Continued as is 0
Dynamic operation such as first-
Continued as is Initialization
order lag dead time
Process alarms, STC alarms, and
Continued as is OFF
system alarms (including latches)
Analog output terminal Y1 Continued as is -20%
Analog output terminal Y2 Continued as is -6.3%
Analog output terminal Y3 Continued as is −6.3% (−20% at current output)
Analog output terminal Y4 Continued as is 0%
Analog output registers Y5, Y6 Continued as is 0%
Peer-to-peer communication
Continued as is 0
registers CX, CY, CI, and CO
DO1 to DO10 Continued as is OFF
Communication loss CMWDT Continued as is Disabled (0 second)
Integral output pulse Continued as is OFF
PF key lamp Continued as is OFF
6-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Power Failure Duration and Operation in Each Start Mode
Start
mode
AUT
Continuous HOT start HOT start
mode
M-COLD
Continuous HOT start M-COLD start
mode
A-COLD
Continuous HOT start A-COLD start
mode
C-COLD
Continuous HOT start C-COLD start
mode
COLD
6
Continuous HOT start COLD start
mode
Processing during Power Failures

▲ ▲ Time
t1 t2
20ms (100V AC) About 2 s
1ms (24V DC)
Power failure
Momentary power failure Power failure
insensitive
[Failure insensitive region (power failure duration < t1)] : t1 = about 1 ms (for 24 V DC type)
: t1 = about 20 ms (for 100 V AC type)
YS1000 performs the same operation
as that of continuity status.
[Momentary failure region (t1< power failure duration < t2)] : t2 = about 2 s
The instrument stops operation during
power failure.
[Power failure region (t2 < power failure duration)]:
The instrument stops operation during
power failure.
0601E.ai
Setting Details
Display Title
AUT: HOT start
M-COLD:
Power failure duration<2sec.; HOT start
Power failure duration≥2sec.; M-COLDstart
A-COLD:
Tuning Display>
Engineering Display>
START Start mode Power failure duration≥2sec.; A-COLDstart
[CONFIG1] (Configuration
C-COLD:
Display1)
Power failure duration≥2sec.; C-COLDstart
COLD:
Power failure duration≥2sec.; COLDstart
IM 01B08B02-02EN 6-3
Blank Page
Chapter 7 Self-tuning Function
7.1 Overview of Self-tuning Function

7.1.1 What is Self-tuning?
In locations where a control system is operating, an improvement in more precise
controllability is required to:
(1) Improve product quality
(2) Stringently reduce material and energy requirements
(3) Respond to the adoption of multi-product variable-volume production systems
(4) Respond to more than one type of raw material or fuel
(5) Respond to frequent changes in operating conditions or loads
A number of PID controllers are used in process control systems. To implement and
maintain the optimum control conditions of a control loop, PID parameters must be tuned.
This has been based on the adjustment experience and knowledge of a skilled operator
or instrumentation engineer and his operational know-how specifically related to each
process. Hence, the operator is always expected to perform precise tuning depending on
the process operating conditions.
However, owing to the wide range of complex jobs handled by veteran operators, there
are at times cases where the tuning of PID parameters is insufficient. 7
This self-tuning control (STC) function is very useful because the parameter follows
the process change automatically without requiring the setting of the PID controller
Self-tuning Function
parameters every time.
The objectives of the self-tuning function are summarized in the following two points:
 To maintain optimum control following changes in static and dynamic process
characteristics
 To reduce the burden of operators’ tuning workloads during process start-up
7.1.2 Features and Usage Effects

The self-tuning (STC) function is a combination of process identification techniques
based on control theory and long-term control know-how. It has the following features:
 The self-tuning (STC) function estimates process characteristics through a response

made by a single setpoint change or MV changes by an on-demand command and
promptly calculates the optimum PID parameters. Thus, there is no need to wait for
waveform observation results that extend over a long period.
 The process is not interrupted because no periodical application of test signals is
required.
 Characteristic changes can be monitored because the estimated process
characteristics (dead time, time constant, and gain) are displayed during self-tuning
(STC).
 The user is not required to have any special knowledge of control theory.
 The self-tuning function is easy to use as there are only a few selections necessary to
set parameters.
 High and low limit values can be set for PID parameters to facilitate safe operations.
 Self-tuning (STC) can be switched ON/OFF.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-1
7.2 Operation Principle
7.2.1 Self-tuning
In general, as the self-tuning controller (STC) updates PID parameters subsequent
to process characteristic changes, in order to improve controllability it is necessary to
capture the characteristic changes quickly.
In self-tuning (STC), to calculate PID parameters the controller continuously observes
fluctuations in the process variable (PV) and manipulated output value (MV). It estimates
a process characteristic model from the resultant waveform response to a setpoint (SV)
change or manipulated output value (MV) changes using an on-demand command.
The figure below illustrates the operating principle of the self-tuning (STC) function.
Estimated model
PID computation Process characteristic

estimation
PID Response
monitoring
SV PID controller Process

MV PV
0701E.ai
Self-tuning (STC) Function’s Operating Principle Diagram
7.2.2 Response Monitoring

The self-tuning controller (STC) continuously observes the process variable (PV) and
manipulated output variable (MV) to collect data in a way similar to that of a skilled
operator determining the next manipulated output variable (MV) by monitoring the
process variable (PV) and manipulated output variable (MV) behavior on the recorder
chart.
Collected data is filtered to remove noise such as measurement noise and drifts in
measured data. If a setpoint (SV) change or process variable (PV) fluctuation exceeds a
certain criterion, the controller performs process characteristic estimation.
7.2.3 Estimating Process Characteristics

The STC controller starts an estimation computation of process characteristics by
collating the collected process variable (PV) and manipulated output variable (MV)
waveform responses. Because the controller estimates process characteristics once
using waveforms, estimation can be performed in very short response time.
A process characteristic is expressed with the equivalent dead time (LM), equivalent time
constant (TM), and equivalent process gain (GM) using first-order lag and dead time
systems. Furthermore, the certainty factor (presumed accuracy error (CR)) is calculated
from these estimated results.
The process variable (PV) signals fluctuate due to the effects of disturbances and noise
signals, as well as manipulated output variable (MV) signals. Thus, if these influences
are large, the certainty factor (presumed accuracy error (CR)) of the estimated results
decreases. The STC controller does not set PID parameters if the certainty factory
(presumed accuracy) is low in consideration of process safety.
Once estimation computation is carried out, the controller observes the waveforms
again every specified time and if it detects a change in response, it repeats the process
characteristic estimation.
7-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN
7.2 Operation Principle
7.2.4 PID Parameter Tuning

The self-tuning controller (STC) calculates the optimum PID parameters depending on
the designation of the control target type (OS), control operation formula (ALG), and
high limit setpoint for derivative time (DMX) in response to the process characteristic
estimated results.
Generally, in a PID controller optimum PID parameters are different when following the
setpoint and when suppressing disturbances.
The STC controller calculates PID parameters for disturbance suppression when the
control operation formulas (ALG) are the PV proportional type of PID control (I-PD) and
of an adjustable setpoint filter (SVF) type. It calculates PID parameters for following a
setpoint when the formulas are the PV derivative type of PID control (PI-D).
It is recommended that the STC controller employ the SVF type which is capable of
optimization in both suppressing disturbances and following setpoints. In this case, the
optimum value of the setpoint filter α (SFA) parameter for SVF is also calculated.
PB, TI, and TD are obtained from this by the setting of each parameter:
PB= f1 (LM, TM, GM, IP, OS, ALG)
TI = f2 (LM, TM, GM, IP, OS, ALG)
TD= f3 (LM, TM, GM, IP, OS, ALG)
*1: where PB: Proportional band, TI: Integral time, TD: Derivative time, OS: Control target type,
7
IP: Process type, ALG: Control operation formula, LM: Equivalent dead time, TM: Equivalent
time constant, GM: Equivalent process gain
*2: Note that the following parameters are automatically calculated; they cannot be set.
LM: Equivalent dead time, TM: Equivalent time constant, and GM: Equivalent process gain
► For parameters: See 7.3 Self-tuning Parameters and Operations, in this manual.
► For adjustable setpoint filter (SVF) and setpoint filter α (SFA): see 1.2.6 Performing Stable
Control for the Step Response of Setpoints (Adjustable Setpoint Filter), in this manual.
Usually, the self-tuning (STC) controller calculates PID parameters based on the
estimated results, but when it determines that the response has started to oscillate, it
carries out tuning by stopping oscillation once. In addition, to increase the controller gain
if control deviation does not decrease for an extended period, the controller limits the
gain to a smaller range to ensure system safety.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-3
7.3 Self-tuning Parameters and Operations
7.3.1 Parameters and Operations
Description
The table below shows a list of display setting parameters relating to the self-tuning (STC)
function.
Self-tuning (STC) Related Parameter Names and Details

Necessity of Setting (*1)
Parameter Name Setting Range Unit Default
OFF DISP ON ATSTUP
STC STC mode selection OFF, DISP, ON, ATSTUP – OFF    
On-demand tuning
OD OFF, ON – OFF –   –
start
PB1, PB2 Proportional band 0.1 to 999.9 % 999.9    −
TI1, TI2 Integral time 1 to 9999 Sec 1000    −
0 to 9999
TD1, TD2 Derivative time Sec 0    
(0: no action)
IP1, IP2 Process type STATIC, DYNAM – STATIC −   −
TR1, TR2 Process response time 4 to 9999 Sec 300 −   −
0.0 to 20.0%
Engineering
NB1, NB2 Noise band Equivalent engineering 0.0 −   −
units
units
OS1, OS2 Control target type ZERO, MIN, MED, MAX – MED −   
MI1, MI2 MV-applied signal span 0.0 to 20.0 % 5.0 −   
High limit setpoint for
PMX1, PMX2 2.0 to 999.9 % 999.9 −   −
proportional band
Low limit setpoint for
PMN1, PMN2 2.0 to 999.9 % 2.0 −   −
proportional band
IMX1, IMX2 1 to 9999 Sec 9999 −   −
integral time
Low limit setpoint for
IMN1, IMN2 1 to 9999 Sec 1 −   −
integral time
DMX1, DMX2 0 to 9999 Sec 2000 −   −
derivative time
Calculated proportional
PA1, PA2 2.0 to 999.9 % 999.9 / / / /
band
Calculated integral
IA1, IA2 1 to 9999 Sec 1000 / / / /
time
Calculated derivative
DA1, DA2 0 to 9999 Sec 0 / / / /
time
Presumed accuracy
CR1, CR2 0.00 to 99.99 % 0.00 / / / /
error
RT1, RT2 Signal distribution ratio 0.000 to 9.999 – 1.000 / / / /
LM1, LM2 Equivalent dead time 0 to 9999 Sec 0 / / / /
Equivalent time
TM1, TM2 0 to 9999 Sec 0 / / / /
constant
Equivalent process
GM1, GM2 0.000 to 9.999 – 0.000 / / / /
gain
*1 : Item required to be set, −: Item not required to be set, /: Display-dedicated item,
: Item required to be set at on-demand tuning
The PB2, TI2, TD2, IP2, TR2, NB2, OS2, MI2, PMX2, PMN2, IMX2, IMN2, DMX2, PA2, IA2,
DA2, CR2, RT2, LM2, TM2, and GM2 parameters are used for loop 2 in the cascade, selector, or
programmable modes.
7-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(1) STC mode selection (STC)

The self-tuning (STC) function can be selected in the four modes shown in the table
below.
List of STC Mode Selections

Setpoint Description
OFF The self-tuning (STC) function is stopped.
Estimates the process and calculates PID parameters, but does not
DISP
update PID parameters.
Estimates the process, calculates PID parameters and automatically
ON
updates PID parameters.
Used at startup or if an initial setpoint is unknown. Computes self-
ATSTUP
tuning (STC) related parameters from a step response and sets them
(Auto-startup)
automatically.
Setting OFF, DISP, ON, or ATSTUP to the STC mode selection enables self-tuning (STC).
► For operations in each mode: see 7.4 Self-tuning (STC) Operations in Each Mode, in this
manual.
(2) On-demand tuning (OD)

The table below describes an on-demand tuning (OD) function.
This function applies a step signal to the manipulated output variable and then 7
automatically returns to STC = DISP or STC = ON. It is used for systems where setpoints
should not be changed excessively .
On-demand Tuning (OD)
Setpoint Description
Performs self-tuning (STC) with a stepwise test signal applied to the
manipulated output variable (MV). (This function is available only
ON when the STC mode selection is DISP or ON.)
OD is used for cases where the setpoint (SV) should not be
changed.
OFF Deactivates the on-demand tuning (OD) function.
► For on-demand tuning (OD) operations: see 7.4 Self-tuning (STC) Operations in Each Mode, in
this manual.
(3) PID parameters (PB1, PB2, TI1, TI2, TD1, and TD2)
These PID parameters are used in control computation. Initial PID parameters are set in
the following manner:
1) For a new process
If PID parameters can be determined by analogy or calculated from other process
results, use them. If it is difficult to determine them using these means, use auto-
startup (ATSTUP).
2) If auto-startup (ATSTUP) cannot be used
Start self-tuning with the STC mode selection set to DISP and use the PID values
displayed as updated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2).
3) For replacement of the control system in the existing process
Use PID parameters that were in use prior to replacement.
► For calculated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2): see 7.3.1 (10), Calculated PID
values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2), in this manual.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-5
(4) Process type (IP1, IP2)

Specify whether the process is static (STATIC) or astatic (integral system) (DYNAM).
For static processes, if a step change is applied to the manipulated output variable (MV)
as shown in figure (1) below, the process variable (PV) reaches equilibrium with a settled
value over time.
As shown in figure (2) below, an astatic system is a process where the PV rises or drops
infinitely when a step change is applied to a manipulated variable (MV). This is equivalent
to level control by a metering pump where the rate of outflow is consistent.
(1) Static process
MV
PV settled value
PV
Time

(2) Astatic (integral system) process
PV
MV
Time
0702E.ai
Step Response in Static and Astatic (Integral System) Processes
(5) Process response time (TR1, TR2)

Specify the time equivalent to a 95% rise time of the process step response (in an open
loop). From this time the self-tuning controller (STC) calculates the observation time
for the measured signal waveforms, and the sampling time for estimating the process
characteristics.
The process response time is appropriately set in the following ways.
 Estimation from the process step-response waveform:

Calculate the time taken by the process variable change (∆PV) to reach 95% of the
final PV-settled value. If the step response is approximated by dead time (L) and
first-order lag time constant (T), then TR = L + 3T.
 For an astatic (integral system) process:

Calculate the time taken by the process variable change (∆PV) to reach 95% of
the final PV-settled value when a pulse input is applied to the manipulated output
variable (MV).
 Estimation from the state operated up to that point:

Read the period (TP) of an almost satisfactory damped oscillation waveform and
set TR = TP.
 If response time variation is expected

Match the process response time to that of the response waveform to be controlled.
If the process variable (PV) response time is different between the rise and fall as
in furnace temperatures, set the response time to the most dramatic rise and fall .
7-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Notes:
1/20th of the process response time becomes the sampling period (TS) for estimation
of the process, but a response waveform having a period shorter than 2TS cannot be
properly captured.
In general, the process characteristic estimated value error becomes smaller if the
process response time is set to be greater rather than smaller than the actual value.
Moreover, if the process response time is changed, the self-tuning controller (STC) does
not operate during 4TR because measured data in the controller is initialized.
(1) Estimation from a step response
MV
PV Settled value
PV
95%
Time
TR
7

(2) Estimation from damped oscillation waveform
TR=TP
PV
TP
Natural oscillation period
Time
0703E.ai
Estimation Method of Process Response Time
(6) Noise band (NB1, NB2)

Noise band (NB) is used to prevent process-characteristic estimations from being
disturbed by noise.
In setting NB, set it at approximately the equal height of the peak value of a random
noise signal superimposing on the process variable (PV) signal. In the figure below, with
the setpoint at other than 0 (default value), the STC controller estimates the process
characteristics if the process variable (PV) response waveform oscillates by more than
(preset value + 1/2 NB).
NB
Preset value

0704E.ai
Noise Band
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-7
(7) Control target type (OS1, OS2)

Set the control target desired by the user. The desired response waveform differs
depending on the process type or operation method.
For example, overshoot is not preferred in the temperature control of reaction or heat
treatment processes. In contrast, it is often said in pressure control or flow rate control
that quick response comes first and overshoot is allowed to a certain extent. The table
below shows the types and features of the control target types:
Control Target Types and Features

Setpoint Features Performance Criteria
ZERO Overshoot: None Overshoot: Zero
Overshoot: Small (about 5%) Weighted control area: Minimum
MIN
Settling time: Short Min ∫∞0 |e| • t dt
Overshoot: Medium (about 10%) Control area: Minimum
MED
Rise time: A little fast Min ∫∞0 |e| dt
Overshoot: Large (about 15%) Square control area: Minimum
MAX
Rise time: Fast Min ∫∞0 e2 dt
When control target type = ZERO, there is no overshoot.

When control target type = MIN, overshoot decreases because the performance criteria
in which a deviation area is multiplied with the time elapsed is minimized.
When control target type = MED, the control area shown below is minimized.
(Recommended)
Control area
SV

PV response
Time
0705E.ai
Control Area (Case Where a Setpoint (SV) is Changed)
When control target type = MAX, the square area value of a deviation (E) is minimized
resulting in the achievement of a quick rise with a moderately large overshoot.
(8) MV-applied signal span (MI1, MI2)

Specify a test signal step change applied to the manipulated output variable (MV) in the
auto startup (ATSTUP) or on-demand tuning (OD). As a guide, set it so that the process
variable (PV) deflects about 5%.
• In auto startup (ATSTUP), the applied signal is given in the direction the sign of the
deviation (E) extends since it is performed in manual control (M).
• In on-demand tuning (OD), the applied signal is given in the direction deviation (E)
decreased, since it is performed in automatic control (A) or cascade setting automatic
control (C).
Direction of an MV Step Change

DIR (Direct action) RVS (Reverse action)
SV>PV +MI% (−MI%) −MI% (+MI%)
SV<PV −MI% (+MI%) +MI% (−MI%)
SV=PV +MI% (+MI%) −MI% (−MI%)
Item out of parentheses: For auto startup (ATSTUP), Item in parentheses: For on-demand turning
(OD)
7-8 IM 01B08B02-02EN
(9) PID limit values

These parameters are used to limit the range of PID parameter changes during self-
tuning(STC). If PID parameter changes appear to adversely affect the process by
exceeding certain limits, set the limit values in advance. If a high limit value is set that is
less than or equal to the low limit value, the parameter is fixed at the low limit value.
If a PID parameter reaches a limit value during self-tuning (STC), a self-tuning alarm
(STCALM) occurs. (Calculated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2) are not
limited.)
When the STC mode selection (STC) is DISP or ON, PI control is designated if the
high limit setpoint for derivative time (DMX) is set to “0”. PID control.or PI control is also
designated if DMX is set to a value other than 0.
► For calculated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2): see 7.3.1 (10) Calculated PID
► For self-tuning alarm (STCALM): see 7.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms, in this manual.
(10) Calculated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2)
Parameters calculated from process characteristics estimated from self-tuning can be
displayed but are not used for control computation.
If a calculated PID parameter reaches a limit value, the self-tuning alarm (STCALM)
occurs, but the displayed value is not limited.
► For self-tuning alarm (STCALM): see 7.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms, in this manual. 7
(11) Presumed accuracy errors (CR1, CR2)
These errors represent an error of accuracy presumed when the process characteristics
are estimated.
If the estimated results match the actual process, the presumed accuracy error
becomes small. If the estimated results are unsatisfactory due to the effects of noise or
disturbances, the presumed accuracy error becomes large.
If the presumed accuracy error is greater than 5%, in consideration of safety the self-
tuning controller (STC) determines that estimation cannot be made and tries to conduct
estimation again without making PID calculations.
(12) Signal variance ratio (RT1, RT2)

The ratio of the process variable’s (PV) variance to the set model output’s variance is
displayed.
The self-tuning controller (STC) calculates this ratio using an estimated model to detect
variations in process characteristics.
If STC mode selection = ON has not yet been held, the STC controller does not calculate
a signal variance ratio, but displays a default value of 1.000 and issues no alarm.
If the process and model agree with each other, the signal variance ratio becomes almost
“1.” If a signal distribution ratio is ≥ 0.5 or ≥ 2, the STC controller generates an alarm (large
characteristic change).
(13) Estimated equivalent model (LM1, LM2, TM1, TM2, GM1, and GM2)
The STC controller expresses an estimated process model by approximating it with
dead time and first-order lag systems (or with a response to pulse input in the case of an
astatic (integral) system).
The equivalent dead time, equivalent time constant, and equivalent process gain are
updated if STC mode selection (STC) is DISP or ON, and the presumed accuracy
error is less than 5%. (The presumed accuracy error is updated each time the process
characteristics are estimated.)
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-9
7.4 Self-tuning (STC) Operations in Each Operation
Mode
The self-tuning (STC) function automatically adjusts the PID parameters to achieve
optimum control status in PID control.
The figure below shows a self-tuning (STC) function operation flow.
Start
Auto startup Self-tuning (STC) function stopped

(STC mode selection = ATSTUP) STC mode (STC mode = OFF)
selected?
(STC mode selection = DISP or ON)
Acquire PV and MV
Is the PV
NO fluctuating?
YES
Estimate process
characteristics
Is the
presumed accuracy
NO high?
YES
Calculate PID
Startup processing parameters
STC
mode selection
= ON? NO (STC mode selection = DISP)
Processing YES
YES
completed?
Only display
NO (STC mode selection = ON) calculated PID values
Set PID
parameter change
PID control
Return
0706E.ai
Self-tuning (STC) Operation Flow Chart
In the figure above, when the STC mode selection is DISP or ON, self-tuning proceeds
through the central part of the flow and acquires process variables (PV) and manipulated
output variables (MV).
If process variable (PV) variation is within the specified values, controllability is assumed
to be good. If PV variation exceeds a specified value, the STC controller estimates the
process characteristics. If certainty (presumed accuracy (CR)) is high, it calculates PID
parameters.
The user can specify whether calculated PID parameters are used in control computation.
If it has been specified that the parameters are not to be updated (STC mode selection
= DISP), only new parameters are displayed. If it has been specified that they are to
be updated (STC mode selection = ON), the PID parameters are updated to the new
parameters.
These operations are performed once in every control period of the controller.
7-10 IM 01B08B02-02EN
7.4 Self-tuning (STC) Operations in Each Operation Mode
7.4.1 STC Mode Selection = ATSTUP

In this mode, the controller automatically calculates self-tuning (STC) related parameters
and the setpoint filter α (SFA) for the adjustable setpoint filter (SVF) from a step response
and sets them. After setting the parameters, the self-tuning changes to STC mode
selection (STC) = ON to conduct control.
► For adjustable setpoint filter (SVF) and setpoint filter α (SFA): see 1.2.6 Performing Stable
Control for the Step Response of Setpoints (Adjustable Setpoint Filter), in this manual.
(1) Applicability of ATSTUP

The following shows the applicability of ATSTUP in the controller modes (CTL) and
control modules.
Controller Mode (CTL) Applicability

Single-loop mode (SINGLE) 
Multi-function mode Cascade mode (CAS) 
Selector mode (SELECT) N/A
Basic control module (BSC1) 
Programmable mode
Cascade control module (CSC)  7
Selector control module (SSC) N/A
Legend : Applicable, N/A: Not available
(2) Setting parameters
To use auto startup (ASTSTUP), set the parameters described in 7.3 Self-tuning
Parameters and Operations.
Note that when the setting derivative time (TD) = 0, PI control is selected. If the setting
derivative time (TD) is set to a value other than “0,” PID control is selected. (If PI control
is judged to be desirable as a result of auto startup (ATSTUP), there are cases where PI
control is selected.)
(3) Operating procedure and operations

1) First check that no self-tuning alarm (STCALM) is being given.
* If a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) is being issued, eliminate the cause of the
alarm.
2) In manual control (M), set the STC mode selection to ATSTUP.
This starts auto startup (ATSTUP), causing [ATSTUP] to be displayed on the LOOP
Display’s control status display section.
3) Fully stabilize the process variable (PV) signal manually at an appropriate value.
4) Switch the operation mode to cascade setting automatic control (C) or automatic
control (A).
* The controller retains the current manipulated output variable (MV) for 30
seconds.
5) The controller automatically gives the step change of the MV-applied signal span (MI)
to direct the manipulated output variable (MV) in a safe direction (a direction in which
the deviation is not reversed, but extended).
* PID control is not yet started.
6) Observe the response of the process variable (PV) with respect to the step change.
* If a PV variation range (∆PV) exceeds MI × 1.5, the controller automatically
returns the manipulated output value (MV) to the original value.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-11
7) When the process variable (PV) is stabilized, the controller automatically returns the
manipulated output variable (MV) to the original value and observes the PV signal
response.
* If the process gain is low and the PV variation range (∆PV) is less than 2%, auto
startup (ATSTUP) is considered inappropriate. In such a case the operation
mode returns to manual control (M) and the STC mode selection changes to
DISP after the maximum observation time (about 80 minutes) has passed,
causing a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) to be occurred.
8) Using the data obtained from the step response, the controller estimates the process
characteristics and calculates the PID parameters (PB, TI, and TD) in the same
manner as in the case of STC mode selection = ON.
The PID limit values are set to values four times the PID parameters (PB, TI, and TD)
(high limit setpoint) and 1/4 of the time for the PID parameters (low limit setpoint).
The process response time (TR) is set to “LM + 3TM” seconds. The process type (IP)
is set from the process variable (PV) at the beginning and from that at the end of the
response.
Furthermore, if it has been determined that the process characteristic estimated
results are inappropriate, the controller issues a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) and
stops auto startup (ATSTUP).
9) Then the controller observes the noise peak value for a successive specified time
(2T5, or 2 minutes minimum to 5 minutes maximum) and calculates the noise band
(NB) from the observed peak value.
10) When all setting items have been calculated and correctly set, the STC mode
selection automatically changes to ON, starting PID control and self-tuning (STC).
11) If any of the following situations occur during auto startup (ATSTUP), the controller
stops operations to change to manual control (M) and changes the STC mode
selection to DISP.
• Power failure
• Occurrence of a self-tuning alarm (STCALM)
• Change to manual control (M)
7.4.2 STC Mode Selection = DISP

This mode is effective for the preliminary self-tuning (STC) test. In this mode, the
controller estimates the process characteristics, calculates the PID parameters, and
displays calculated values for the calculated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and
DA2). By observing these values, the user can check in advance whether self-tuning will
be effective or not. Note that the PID parameters (PB1, PB2, TI1, TI2, TD1, and TD2) are
not changed.
With the STC mode selection in DISP, setting the controller to automatic control (A) or
cascade setting automatic control (C) enables the self-tuning function to start. However,
if a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) has occurred, the cause of the alarm must be eliminated
first.
*: To use the STC mode selection in DISP, set the parameters described in 7.3 Self-
tuning Parameters and Operations.
► For PID parameters (PB1, PB2, TI1, TI2, TD1, and TD2): see 7.3.1 (3) PID parameters (PB1,
PB2, TI1, TI2, TD1, and TD2), in this manual.
► For calculated PID values (PA1, PA2, IA1, IA2, DA1, and DA2): see 7.3.1 (10) Calculated PID
7-12 IM 01B08B02-02EN
7.4.3 STC Mode Selection = ON

In this mode, the controller estimates the process characteristics and calculates PID
parameters. The PID parameters for control are automatically updated.
With the STC mode selection ON, setting the controller to automatic control (A) or
cascade setting automatic control (C) enables the self-tuning function to start. However,
if a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) has occurred, the cause of the alarm must be eliminated
first.
► For self-tuning alarms (STCALM): see 7.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms, in this manual.
7.4.4 STC Mode Selection = OFF

In this mode, self-tuning (STC) operation is not performed. The controller operates as an
ordinary PID controller.
7.4.5 On-demand Tuning (OD)

In the on-demand tuning (OD) mode, the STC controller applies a stepwise test signal to
the manipulated output variable (MV) in a closed loop state at the operator’s request and
implements self-tuning (STC) from the response of the process variable (PV) at that time.
(When STC mode selection = DISP or ON.)
This mode is effective if the setpoint (SV) cannot be changed.
7
On-demand tuning (OD) = OFF
Operation by the on-demand tuning (OD) function is not performed.
On-demand tuning (OD) = ON
The figure below shows the response when the on-demand tuning (OD) function is
activated.
MV
PV

Tuning
On-demand command
0707E.ai
(1) Applicable conditions

The on-demand tuning (OD) function operates only when all of the following conditions
are met.
1) Controller mode (CTL)

The following table shows the applicability of the OD function in the controller mode
and control modules.
Controller Mode (CTL) Applicability

Single-loop mode (SINGLE) 
Multi-function mode Cascade mode (CAS) 
Selector mode (SELECT) N/A
Programmable mode
Cascade control module (CSC) 
Selector control module (SSC) N/A
Legend : Applicable, N/A: Not available
► For basic control modules, cascade control modules, and selector control modules: see
YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable Function User’s Manual.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-13
2) Operation mode
Set the operation mode to automatic control (A) or cascade setting automatic control
(C). In cascade setting automatic control (C), the on-demand tuning function does
not operate in the DDC or SPC modes.
3) STC mode selection

Set the STC mode selection to DISP or ON.
(2) Setting parameters

To use the on-demand tuning (OD) function, set the parameters described in 7.3 Self-
tuning Parameters and Operation.
(3) Operation procedure and operations

(1) Check that the operation mode is in automatic control (A) or cascade setting automatic
control (C).
(2) Check that the STC mode selection is DISP or ON.
(3) Set the on-demand tuning (OD) to ON.
(Setting the STCOD flag from “0” to “1” using user programs enables the activation of
the OD function.)
(4) An MV-applied signal span (MI) is added to the manipulated output variable (MV).
(5) Self-tuning (STC) is performed based on the process variable (PV) response.
7.4.6 Starting and Stopping the Self-tuning Function

 Control target
The self-tuning (STC) function always operates on one control loop. The following
describes control loops that can be operated by the STC function. Start/stop of the self-
tuning function can be specified by changes made with keys or by using user programs.
Multi-function Mode
Controller Mode (CTL) Description
Single-loop mode Setting the STC mode designation enables the self-tuning
(SINGLE) function to be operable.
The loop to be controlled is determined by the open/closed
status.
Multi-function mode Cascade mode (CAS)
• Loop 2 is controlled in the open status.
• Loop 1 is controlled in the closed status.
Selector mode
The loop selected by auto selector (ATSEL) is controlled.
(SELECT)
Programmable Mode
Controller Mode (CTL) Description
Basic control module Setting the STC mode designation enables the self-tuning
(BSC1) function to be operable.
Basic control module
Specifies the loop to be controlled using user programs.
(BSC2)
Programmable mode The loop to be controlled is determined by the open/closed

Cascade control status.
module (CSC) • Loop 2 is controlled in the open status.
• Loop 1 is controlled in the closed status.
Selector control
The loop selected by auto selector (ATSEL) is controlled.
module (SSC)
* When the multi-function mode’s cascade mode (CAS) or the programmable mode’s cascade
control module (CSC) is used in the closed (CLOSE) status, activating auto startup (ATSTUP)
or on-demand tuning (OD) causes an MV-applied signal span (MI) to be added to the Loop
1’s manipulated output variable (MV). In this case, the Loop 1’s manipulated output variable
can be seen as setpoint 2 (SV2) on the display.
► For basic control modules, cascade control modules, and selector control modules: see
YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable Function User’s Manual.
7-14 IM 01B08B02-02EN
 Starting and stopping the self-tuning (STC) function

The self-tuning (STC) function continues operating when the STC mode selection is
DISP or ON, but it can be stopped and started. It can also be operated using a digital
input (DI) signal.
This feature is useful when the self-tuning (STC) function needs to be stopped during
shutdown, or when it is in transition status in a batch process, or in the event of a
foreseen disturbance in other processes.
 Self-tuning (STC) stop command by means of digital input while in the multi-
function mode
A self-tuning (STC) stop command can be implemented using a digital input.
► For stopping self-tuning using digital input: see Chapter 3, Auxiliary Input and Output
Functions, in this manual.
 Self-tuning (STC) stop command using the PF key in the multi-function mode
To stop self-tuning (STC) using the PF key, set the PF key function specification to
(PFKEY) = STC. However, if a self-tuning (STC) stop using a digital input has been
specified, the STC stop command using the PF key is disabled.

Display Title
7
Tuning Display >
Selection
−: No function assigned Engineering Display >
PFKEY of PF key
STC: Self-tuning activated [CONFIG3]
function
 Specifying self-tuning (STC) stop using user programs

The self-tuning (STC) function can be set using user programs in addition to setting
it with keys. If the STC function is set using user programs, STC setting with keys is
disabled.
The following shows flags provided by the control module extended function registers
for user programs.
(1) STC operation mode specification flags (STCM1, STCM2)
(2) STC target loop flag (STCLP)
(3) On-demand specification flag (STCOD)
(4) STC start/stop flag (STCSW)
► For user programs and extended function registers: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700
Programmable Function User’s Manual.
1) STC operation mode specification flags (STCM1, STCM2)

The following table shows the correspondence between the STC operation mode
specification flags and self-tuning (STC).
Correspondence between the STC Operation Mode Specification Flags and STC Modes
STCM1 STCM2 STC Mode Description
0 0 OFF Stops the self-tuning (STC) function.
1 0 DISP Displays PID parameters.
0 1 ON Updates PID parameters automatically.
1 1 ATSTUP Auto startup
STC mode selection (OFF, DISP, ON, ATSTUP) can be identified based on the
values of the STC operation mode specification flags specified in the table above.
Writing relevant values to the register enables the set up of STC mode selection.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-15
2) STC target loop flag (STCLP)

The STC target loop flag specifies the loop to be controlled when a basic control
module (BSC1, BSC2) is used. Moreover, if the STC target loop flag (STCLP) is not
specified in user programs, the Loop 1 becomes the target.
STC Target Loop Flag

STCLP Description
0 Loop 1 is the target.
1 Loop 2 is the target.
3) On-demand specification flag (STCOD)

The following table shows the start/stop of the on-demand tuning (OD) function using
the on-demand specification flag.
On-demand Specification Flag
STCOD OD Description
0 OFF Stops on-demand tuning (OD).

1 ON Starts on-demand tuning (OD).
4) STC start/stop flag (STCSW)

The following table shows the start/stop of the self-tuning (STC) function using the
STC start/stop flag.
STC Start/Stop Flag

STCSW Description
1 Stops the self-tuning (STC) function.
0 Does not stop the STC function.
* f the STC start/stop flag = 0, the self-tuning (STC) function set by STC mode selection or the
STC operation mode specification flag operates.
7-16 IM 01B08B02-02EN

The following shows a self-tuning (STC) function block diagram.
STCSW STC start/stop

0: Start
1: Stop
STCLP STC target loop

0: Loop 1
1: Loop 2
Parameter
STCM1
STC
STCM2
STC mode designation

OFF
DISP
ON
ATSTUP
Parameter
STCOD OD 7
On-demand tuning
OFF
ON
Parameter
IPn PAn
TRn IAn
NBn DAn
OSn CRn
MIn RTn
PMXn LMn
PMNn TMn
IMXn GMn
IMNn
DMXn *n=1, 2
0708E.ai
The following shows a self-tuning (STC) function block diagram.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-17
7.4.7 Combining STC with Various Control Functions

Self-tuning (STC) is applied to PID control, which composes feedback loops. Thus, if a
feedback loop cannot be configured by switching the operation mode or by combining
STC with sequence computation, the self-tuning function should be stopped.
 Combining self-tuning (STC) with controller modes (CTL)

The following table shows the combination of self-tuning (STC) with control functions or
controller modes (CTL).
Combination of Self-tuning (STC)with Control Functions

Control Functions DISP ON ATSTUP OD
Single-loop mode (SINGLE)    
Multi-function
Controller Mode (CTL) Cascade mode (CAS)    
mode
Selector mode (SELECT)   – –
Standard PID control (PID)    
Control Type (CNT)
Proportional (PD) control – – – –
Non-linear PID control    
Output limiter    
Control Method
PID control with reset bias    
Feedforward control (*4) × × × ×
Legend : Combination available, ×: Not recommended , −: Not allowed
Combination of Self-tuning (STC)with Control Functions

Control Functions DISP ON ATSTUP OD
Basic function module (BSCn) (*1)    
Programmable
Controller Mode (CTL) Cascade control module (CSC)    
mode
Selector control module (SSC)   – –
Standard PID control (PID)    
Sample-and-hold PI control (S-PI) – – – –
Control Type (CNT)
Batch PID control (BATCH) – – – –
Proportional (PD) control – – – –
Non-linear PID control    
Output limiter    
PID control with reset bias    
Feedforward control (*2) × × × ×
Input compensation (dead time compensation) (*3) × × × ×
Extended Control Registers
Variable gain × × × ×
C ↔ A mode switching   – 
C or A ↔ M mode switching *4 *4 *4 *4
Output tracking – – – –
Preset MV – – – –
*1: n = 1 to 2
*2: The use of self-tuning (STC) with feedforward compensation is not recommended because
if the selection of a feedforward signal or compensation computation is inappropriate,
observation of the process variable (PV) becomes difficult.
*3: In input compensation (dead time compensation) control, it is difficult to measure correct
process dead time. If inappropriate dead time is set, functional overlapping with self-
tuning (STC) results. Thus, a combination of input compensation with STC is not generally
recommended.
However, the combination of input compensation with self-tuning (STC) delivers effects in
applications such as reactors in which the temperature and gain relationship is incorporated
in advance.
7-18 IM 01B08B02-02EN
*4: For switching from C or A mode to M mode or vice versa, if the mode is switched to manual
mode (M), STC mode selection = DISP or ON and on-demand tuning (OD) are disabled.
Also, auto startup (ATSTUP) does not function in automatic control (A) or in cascade setting
Legend
: Combination available
×: Not recommended (No self-tuning alarm (STCALM) is caused, but do not use the
combination specified because self-tuning may not function properly.)
−: Not allowed (A self-tuning alarm occurs.)
► For extended function registers: see YSS1000 Setting Software/YS1700 Programmable
Function User’s Manual
 Combination of self-tuning (STC) and operation modes

The following table shows combination of self-tuning (STC) with each operation mode.
Combination of Self-tuning (STC) and Operation Modes

Operation Mode DISP ON ATSTUP OD
Manual control (M) – –  –
Automatic control (A)   – 
Analog cascade setting mode (CAS)   – 
Cascade Setting (SPC)   – 
7
Automatic Computer cascade mode (CMP)
Control (C) (DDC) – – – –
− (No setting) – – – –
Legend
: Combination available
−: Combination not allowed (A self-tuning alarm (STCALM) occurs.)
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-19
7.4.8 Self-tuning Alarms

If the self-tuning function cannot be operated normally, the status is displayed on the
Alarm Display. The table below shows the displays of self-tuning alarms (STCALM) and
their descriptions.
Self-tuning Alarm (STCALM) Display Items

Name Display Description and Cause STC Operation How to Clear
• Attempt to execute a control operation
formula that is prohibited for combination • STC function stops.
System alarm SYSALM with STC • ATSTUP is disabled
• Control function is not properly executed. (*5) or cancelled. (*6)
• Current output is open. (*2)
PV alarm PVOVR • PV is less than −6.3% or over 106.3%.
• MV is over the output limit MH or ML (with
the exception of manual control (M)). (*3)
Remove the cause of
• MI value is unacceptable before starting
MV alarm MVLMT alarm (*7) or set STC
ATSTUP.
• STC function mode selection = OFF
• MV has been changed or limited after
continues. (*5)
starting ATSTUP.
• ATSTUP is disabled
Operation • Operation abnormal in STC = ATSTUP or cancelled. (*6)
OPERR
abnormality (*4)
• PV changes are too slight to identify
Identification not the process model in STC = ATSTUP.
IDERR
possible (Exceeding the limit time, 80 minutes
max.)
PB alarm PBLMT • PB ≥ PMX or PB ≤ PMN
• STC function Remove the cause of
TI alarm TILMT • TI ≥ IMX or TI ≤ IMN continues. alarm (*7), set STC
• TD ≥ DMX • No alarm is issued mode selection = OFF, or
TD alarm TDLMT during execution of execute ATSTUP (RT is
(With the exception of TD = DMX = 0)
ATSTUP. set to 1.000).
RT alarm RTALM • RT > 2 or RT < 0.5
*1 The meaning of the symbols in the table is as follows:
PV: Process variable, MV: Manipulated output variable, MH: High limit setpoint for MV, ML:
Low limit setpoint for MV, ATSTUP: Auto startup
STC:Self-tuning, MI: MV-applied signal span, PB: Proportional band, PMX: High limit setpoint
for proportional band, PMN: Low limit setpoint for proportional band, TI: Integral time
IMX: High limit setpoint for integral time, IMN: Low limit setpoint for integral time, TD:
Derivative time, DMX: High limit setpoint for derivative time, DMN: Low limit setpoint for
derivative time
RT: Signal distribution ratio
*2: If the basic control module (BSC2) is set as the loop to be controlled by self-tuning (STC) in
the programmable mode (PROG), current output is detected when analog output 3 (Y3) is
opened. In cases other than this, it is detected when analog output 1 (Y1) is opened.
*3: There are the following cases:
(1) If the MV-applied signal span (MI) is applied to the manipulated output variable (MV), the
MV is limited to the high limit setpoint for MV (MHn) and to the low limit setpoint for MV
(MLn). Moreover, there may be cases where the MV exceeds the output range.
(2) If the MV-applied signal span (MI) = 0 is set
7-20 IM 01B08B02-02EN
*4: There are the following cases:

(1) The STC start/stop flag (STCSW) is 1 (stopped).
(2) Transition to BUN status
(3) Transition to the EXT-MAN status (when the multi-function mode is in single mode
(SINGLE))
(4) Transition to the DDC mode, preset MV, or tracking status when the cascade mode is
closed with the multi-function mode in cascade mode (CAS) or the programmable mode
(PROG) in cascade control module (CSC)
(5) Change of the STC target loop (STCLP) at the basic control module (BSCn) in
programmable mode
(6) STC mode selection change
(7) Occurrence of power failure
*5: If an alarm occurs before auto startup (ATSTUP) begins, auto startup does not start even
when the instrument front panel’s “A” key is pressed.
*6: If an alarm occurs after auto startup (ATSTUP) begins, the following statuses are brought
about:
• Operation mode = manual control (M)
• STC mode specification (STC) = DISP
*7: If a self-tuning alarm (STCALM) occurs after auto startup (ATSTUP) has started, the self-
tuning alarm will not be cleared even when the cause of it is eliminated.
In this case, clear the alarm in the following manner:
(1) Display the Alarm Display and press the CLR key.
(2) Re-execute auto startup (with the cause of the alarm eliminated).
(3) Set STC mode selection (STC) = OFF.
7
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-21
7.5 Simulation Test
7.5.1 Scope of Application
To determine the scope of application of the self-tuning (STC) controller, process
simulations and field tests were performed in a wide range of processes and of initial PID
parameters.
Most industrial processes can be approximated using a combination of high-order lag
elements, dead time, and gain as shown in the following equation.
Ke-LS
Gp(s) =
(1+T1S)(1+T2S) ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ (1+TnS)
0709E.ai
The self-tuning (STC) controller exhibits good tuning characteristics for variations in
the process variable due to setpoint and manipulated variable changes. The controller
performs tuning if the process does not adapt to changes in the operating conditions or
load variations which change the process characteristics (gain, dead time, and lag time
constants). It can perform good control for up to a dead time to lag time constant ratio L/T
of approximately 3.
The following conditions are required for the application of the self-tuning controller:
(1) PID control must be possible.
(2) The intervals of the factors that cause changes in control deviation (such as process
characteristic changes and setpoint changes) must be greater than the natural
oscillation period of the control loop.
(3) The response of the PV to the MV can be approximated with dead time and a first-
order lag system (or integral system). (The high order system shown in the above
equation can also be approximated with dead time and a first-order lag system.)
7.5.2 Simulation Examples

This section shows examples of self-tuning at a setpoint change, for the simulated model
shown in the figure below, assuming that the control target type is MED and the PID
control type is SVF. The examples show a case where the response before tuning is
gradual and a case where it is oscillatory. Self-tuning can cause the system to converge
rapidly almost the same desired response pattern from the different initial PID values in
both cases.
Disturbance
Self-tuning + + Process PV
SV +
– controller MV model

PV
e–10S
Process model characteristic Gp (S) = 1+10s
Gain: 1, time constant: 10 seconds, and dead time: 10 seconds

0710E.ai
Simulation Model
7-22 IM 01B08B02-02EN
7.5 Simulation Test
100 100
80 80
SV and PV
SV and PV
60 60
40 40
SV SV
PV
20 PV 20
0 0
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
Time (minutes) Time (minutes)
(Response before STC operation) (Response after STC operation ends)
P = 160%, I = 20 seconds, D = 0 second, SFA = 1.0 P = 89%, I = 14 seconds, D = 2 seconds, SFA = 0.465
0711E.ai
Simulation Example 1 7
100 100
80 80
SV and PV
SV and PV
60 60
40 40
SV SV
PV PV
20 20
0 0
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
Time (minutes) Time (minutes)
(Response before STC operation) (Response after end of STC operation)
P = 80%, I = 20 seconds, D = 0 seconds, SFA = 1.0 P = 90%, I = 14 seconds, D = 2 seconds, SFA = 0.450
0712E.ai
Simulation Example 2
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-23
7.6 Application Guide
This section outlines the precautions, applications, etc. for applying the self-tuning (STC)
function to various controlled systems and control loops.
7.6.1 Stable Control Loop (Continuous Control)

For a stable control loop where the number of setpoint changes is few and the process
characteristics change little, first determine the optimum PID parameter values using the
STC function. Then operate the STC function by narrowing the PID parameter ranges
using the PID limits, or turn OFF the STC function.
7.6.2 Controlling Processes Where Dead Time is a Dominant Factor

It has been confirmed by simulation that if self-tuning (STC) is used together with basic
PID control, good operating conditions are obtained until the ratio L/T (dead time/lag time
constant) increases to 3.
If the L/T ratio is greater than 3, simple PID control is difficult. In such cases, refer to
Smith’s dead time compensation control or sample-and-hold PI control (S-PI). The STC
function, however, cannot be used together with these controls.
7.6.3 Cascade Control

If response in loop 2 is slow, as in temperature cascade control shown in the figure
below, first set the optimum values to the Loop 2’s PID parameters, with the cascade
open and then turn OFF the STC function. Then operate the STC function in loop 1.
Generally, to avoid mutual interference, it is recommended that normally self-tuning be
operated in loop 1 only, which is the main objective of the control.
TC1
Raw material
TC2
Cooling
jacket
Water
Reactor
Steam
Split-range control valve

0713E.ai
Cascade Control
7-24 IM 01B08B02-02EN
7.6.4 Following Fluctuations in Controlled System Characteristics (Dead Time,

Lag Time, and Gain)
The example in the figure below is of a system that controls outgoing flow, F. In this
system, because periodic fluctuations in inflow, (F1) into the tank are large, level control
is activated, causing intermediate outgoing flow (F0), to fluctuate. The fluctuations in F0
are equivalent to the fluctuations in the gain of the process controlled by FIC.
Regarding fluctuations in the characteristics of the controlled system, if the fluctuating
period is longer than the natural oscillation period of the control loop, the STC function
follows the fluctuations. If a change in PV response due to a controlled system
characteristic change is detected, the STC function is activated. The STC function
follows more promptly if a trigger from on-demand tuning exists. Set OD=ON (1) by key
operation or communication.
Intermediate outgoing flow
Pump (F0)
Outgoing flow
Inflow (F1) (F)
7
LIC FIC
Level
Tank
Reflux flow
0714E.ai
Process with Gain Changes
7.6.5 Neutralization Process

In the example of neutralizing control shown below, the pH control process exhibits
a nonlinear characteristic which features extremely large gain in the vicinity of the
neutralizing point, pH = 7, and small gains at both ends.
If the STC function is directly applied to the pH controller, the optimum PID parameters
are calculated in the vicinity of pH = 7, causing the proportional band to converge at the
rate of several hundred percent. Thus, good control is not achieved. In such a case,
linearize the characteristics by combining the STC function with the controller’s nonlinear
elements before applying it.
14
Neutralizer
12
pHC
Liquid to be controlled
10
8
pH
7
6
pH transmitter
4
0
MV (neutralizer)
0714E.ai
Neutralization Control and pH Process Characteristics
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-25
7.6.6 Controlling Tank Levels Having Integral Characteristics

Level control as shown in the figure below is a process in which a constant flow pump is
used to draw liquid at a constant flow rate regardless of the level.
In this case, level H rises linearly as inflow, Q1, increases, showing that this process is
an integral process without self-balancing. Integral process control becomes unstable if
integral action I is increased; control is usually performed by PD action with the integral
action weakened (i.e. with the integral time, TI, increased).
In such an integral process, the self-tuning function (STC) is activated with the process
type set IP = DYNAM. The STC function executes PD control by setting the integral time
long if IP = DYNAM.
Inflow (Q1)
LIC
Liquid level (H)
t
(Q1)

(H)
Level transmitter
Constant flow
Constant flow pump

0716E.ai
Level Control
7.6.7 Control of Process with Hysteresis Characteristics

As in the temperature control of a heating furnace or heat exchanger, there are cases
where the process response times in the heating and cooling processes differ (see figure
below).
When self-tuning (STC) is to be applied to such a process, set the 95% process response
time, TR, to the greater response time. The PID parameters fluctuate between those
optimal to both processes according to the operating direction of the process variable (PV)
response.
Step input
MV
Time
PV
Temperature
Time
Heating process Cooling process

0717E.ai
Hysteresis Characteristics (Step Response)
7-26 IM 01B08B02-02EN
7.6.8 Control of Process with Slow Response of Final Control Element

When a motor valve is used for flow control as shown in the figure below, the motor
valve’s response time may become a dominant control factor as it is greater than the
flowmeter’s response time.
If self-tuning (STC) is applied to the system, the proportional band (PB) is set somewhat
larger than in cases where lag in the final control element would not exist. This is
because the STC function estimates process characteristics including a lag in the final
control element.
If it is necessary to further improve controllability, add phase compensation and the like
by first-order lead computation to compensate for the derivative action (D). (Refer to the
figure below.)
Flowmeter
Motor valve
+ +
FIC PID
– –
M aTDs
1+TDs
a: First-order lead computation gain
TD: First-order lead time constant
0718E.ai
Flow Control by a Motor Valve and Output Compensation by First-order Lead Computation
7
7.6.9 Control Using Program Pattern
If the self-tuning function (STC) is to be applied to a programmed control in which the
temperature controller setpoint (SV) is changed along a certain temperature increase/
decrease pattern as shown in the figure below, the following points should be noted.
Select either PV derivative type PID (PI-D) or adjustable setpoint filter (SVF) for the
control operation formula (ALG). PV proportional PID (I-PD) increases the difficulty of
following up setpoint (SV) changes.
To minimize overshoot when the temperature rise reaches the programmed temperature,
set the STC control target type to OS = ZERO and select SVF.
Generally, if the SV changes gradually in a ramp as seen in increasing or decreasing
temperature, the PID controller causes an offset. When on-demand tuning (OD) is
executed to eliminate the offset, the offset decreases because the manipulated output
variable (MV) is applied in the direction that decreases the control deviation. At the same
time, the PID parameters are computed from the response and set.
Temperature pattern
Temperature
Time
TPG Temperature pattern generator
TIC

Heat treatment furnace
Fuel
0719E.ai
Programmed Temperature Control
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-27
7.6.10 Combining Control with Sequence Control (Batch Control)

A simple batch control process may be affected by a large disturbance, such as the
additional charge of a large amount of raw materials or the extraction of products during
PID control that exceeds the practical correction range in feedback control.
In such cases, compose a sequence to temporarily stop the self-tuning function (STC)
using the STC start/stop function (see the figure below).
If the setpoint (SV) is to remain constant when the operation mode is in automatic control
(A) or in cascade setting automatic control (C) after a batch is completed, stop the STC
function to prevent unnecessary STC operation (see the figure below).
The STC function cannot be used if batch PID control (BATCH) is used for the control
operation formula (ALG).
Additional raw
material charge Batch end
SV
Temperature

PV
Time
STC stop STC stop
0720E.ai
Batch Control
7.6.11 Control of Loops with Interference

 When it is Not Possible to Eliminate Inference
If the self-tuning function (STC) is operated in both loops of a system with interference
such as in the pressure control – flow control system shown in the figure below,
oscillation occurs due to the interference as the PID parameters converge to the optimum
values.
In such cases, stop the STC function in the controller in which fluctuation in the process
variable (PV) is permitted, select a larger proportional band (PB) and integral time (TI)
(e.g., PB = 100 to 200%, TI = 30 to 80 seconds), and apply the STC function only to the
other controller.
PC FC
Pressure
Temperature
0721E.ai
Pressure Control and Flow Rate Control
7-28 IM 01B08B02-02EN
 When it is Possible to Eliminate Inference

If mutual interference exists, such as in the top and bottom temperature controls of a
distillation tower, first carry out non-interference control as illustrated below and configure
the self-tuning function (STC) with the suitable non-interference effects.
Distillation tower T1
×
+
m1
TC1 LL-1
g21
g22
g12
g11
TC2 LL-2
m2 FC
+
7
×
T2
TC1 PID controller
0722E.ai
Non-interference Control of a Distillation Tower, etc.
Non-interference Control:
In the figure above, assume that the transfer function between the output mi of the
controller TCi and temperature Tj is gij. By adding non-interference elements LL-1 and
LL-2 to the system, T1 and T2 are represented as follows.
(Equation)
where i = 1 to 2, j = 1 to 2
As a result, two independent control loops are obtained.
7.6.12 Control of a Loop Having Impulse Noise

The self-tuning function (STC) estimates the process characteristics after removing
impulse noise. If noise occurs frequently, set a noise band (NB). If noise frequently
occurs for short intervals (TR/10 or less), consider noise rejection using a filter.
TR: 95% process response time
IM 01B08B02-02EN 7-29
Blank Page
Chapter 8 Maintenance
WARNING
For products with optional code /FM or /CSA:
(1) Devices must be maintained by professionally trained personnel or ask
YOKOGAWA's sales office or sales representative.
(2) In case of option code /FM, install devices according to NEC (National
Electrical Code: ANSI/NFPA-70).
In case of option code /CSA, all wiring shall comply with Canadian Electrical
Code Part I and local electrical codes.
CAUTION
If the instrument’s front panel becomes soiled or dusty, wipe it gently using a dry,
soft cloth. Do not use organic solvents, chemicals, or chemically treated dust cloths.
Doing so may result in the instrument case becoming deformed or discolored.
8.1 Inspecting Indication Accuracy 8

As a guideline, indication accuracy should be inspected on an annual basis.
Maintenance
8.1.1 Calibration Instruments
Number of
Name Description
Units
DC voltage standard Yokogawa 7651 or equivalent 1
Digital multimeter Yokogawa 7561 or equivalent 1
IM 01B08B02-02EN 8-1
8.1 Inspecting Indication Accuracy
8.1.2 Inspecting Input Indication Accuracy

Follow the procedure below to specifically check input indication accuracy. YS1500 has
four analog inputs, while YS1700 has eight analog inputs including expandable I/O.
(1) Apply a voltage of 1.0 V DC to the analog input terminals using the voltage standard.
(2) On the Input and Output Data Display of the Tuning Display, check that the analog
input signal concerned is equivalent to 0 ±0.1% in the engineering unit.
(3) Similarly, apply a voltage of 5.0 V DC to check that the analog input signal concerned
is equivalent to 100 ±0.1% in the engineering unit.

Display Title
X1 Analog input 1 −25.0 to 125.0
X4 Analog input 4 −25.0 to 125.0 Tuning Display >
[I/O DATA]
Analog input 5/Direct input (Input and Output Data
X5 −25.0 to 125.0
signal output (*1) Display)
X6 Analog input 6 (*2) −25.0 to 125.0
X7 Analog input 7 (*2) −25.0 to 125.0
X8 Analog input 8 (*2) −25.0 to 125.0
*1: This parameter is displayed only in YS1700. If the direct input optional code is specified, it
becomes a direct input signal output.
*2: These parameters are displayed only in the YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O).
8.1.3 Inspecting Output Indication Accuracy

Follow the procedure below to specifically check output indication accuracy. YS1500 has
three analog outputs, while YS1700 has four analog outputs including expandable I/O.
(1) Connect the digital multimeter to the terminals in the current mode if the analog output
terminals are current outputs, or in the voltage mode if they are voltage outputs.
Set the Y2S, Y3S and Y4S to MV on the Configuration Display 1 of the Engineering
Display.
(2) Set the operation mode to manual control.
(3) On the LOOP 1 Display, manipulated the MV and set the MV1 to 0%.
(4) Verify that the reading is 4 mA DC for current output, or that it is 1.0 V DC for voltage
output. (Tolerance is ±0.2% for current output or ±0.1% for voltage output.) (*2)
(5) Similarly, set the MV to 100% to check that the reading is 20 mA DC for current output
and that it is 5.0 V DC for voltage output. (Tolerance is ±0.2% for current output or ±0.1%
for voltage output.)

Display Title
Y1 Analog output 1 −20.0 to 106.3
Tuning Display >
Y2 Analog output 2 −6.3 to 106.3 [I/O DATA]
Y3 Analog output 3 −6.3 to 106.3 (Input and Output Data
Display)
Y4 Analog output 4 (*1) −6.3 to 106.3
*1: This parameter is displayed only in the YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O).
*2: Tolerance is ±0.2 for analog output 4(voltage output).
8-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN
8.2 Recommended Part Replacement Period
The following shows the replaceable part of the YS1000 and the recommended
replacement period.
Recommended
Replaceable Part
Replacement Period
LCD Display Assembly About 8 years
WARNING
Part replacement should be carried out by a YOKOGAWA engineer or an engineer
certified by YOKOGAWA, as safety standard inspection is required. Contact
YOKOGAWA's sales office or sales representative when replacing the parts.
CAUTION
Notes regarding parts with finite life spans
(1) Parts with finite life spans refer to those in which the abrasion or failure period
is expected to be reached within 10 years under normal operating or storage 8
conditions. Therefore, parts with life spans of more than 10 years in terms of
design are not mentioned here.
Maintenance
(2) The recommended replacement period establishes the period at which
preventive maintenance is to be conducted on parts with finite life spans. It
does not constitute assurance against incidental failure.
(3) The recommended replacement period is only a guideline and differs
depending on operating conditions.
(4) The recommended replacement period may be changed according to field
records, etc.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 8-3
8.3 Packaging when Shipping the Product for
Repair
Should the instrument break down and need to be shipped to our sales representative for
repair, handle it as noted below:
WARNING
Prior to shipping the instrument, put it into an antistatic bag and repackage it using
the original internal packaging materials and packaging container.
8-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Chapter 9 Specifications
9.1 General Specifications
WARNING
This instrument is for Measurement Category O (other). Do not use it for
measurements in locations falling under Measurement Categories II, III, and IV.
Internal Wiring
II
Entrance IV III
O
Cable
Outlet
Measurement Description Remarks

Category
For measurements performed on circuits not
O (other)
directly connected to MAINS.
For measurements performed on circuits directly Appliances, portable
II CAT.II
connected to the low voltage installation. equipments, etc.
For measurements performed in the building Distribution board, circuit
III CAT.III
installation. breaker, etc.
For measurements performed at the source of the Overhead wire, cable
IV CAT.IV
low-voltage installation. systems, etc.
Input and Output Signals
Analog input signals (Measurement Category O (other)) 9

Rated voltage to earth of measuring circuit terminal: 33 VACrms (50/60 Hz) or 70 V DC
Item YS1700 Programmable Mode YS1700 Multi-function Mode, YS1500
Specifications
1 to 5 V DC (basic type) 5 points 4 points
1 to 5 V DC
(YS1700 basic type (with expandable 8 points 5 points
I/O))
Direct input (*1)
One out of the above number of points can be used.
(optional specifications)
Input Resistance 1 MΩ
*1: One of mV, thermocouple, RTD, potentiometers, two-wire transmitters, input isolators, or
frequency inputs
For the details of direct input, refer to "Direct Input Specification."
Analog output signals

4 to 20 mA (basic type) 1 point
2 points
1 to 5 V DC (basic type) (One of which can be switched to output 2 points
4 to 20 mA.)
1 to 5 V DC 3 points
(YS1700 basic type (with expandable (One of which can be switched to output 3 points
I/O)) 4 to 20 mA.)

4 to 20 mA 0 to 750 Ω
1 to 5 V DC (analog output 2, 3) 2 kΩ or more
1 to 5 V DC (analog output 4) 10 kΩ or more
IM 01B08B02-02EN 9-1
The current output provides a forced full-closing function for valves (final control
elements).
When a signal decreases, if an output signal becomes -6% (equivalent to 3.04 mA)
or less, the current output decreases abruptly, reaching -20% (equivalent to 0.8 mA).
When a signal increases, if the output signal reaches -5% or more, the current output is
released from -20% (equivalent to 0.8 mA) and returns to -5% (equivalent to 3.2 mA).
When the output signal is 100% or more, the current output increases linearly and is
limited at approximately 106.25% (21 mA).
Current Output
(mA)
21
20
3.2
3.04
0.8
Output Signal
-6 -5 0 100 106.25
(%)
0902E.ai
Digital inputs
Digital input (basic type) 6 points (shared by digital output signals)
Digital input
(YS1700 basic type (with expandable 6 points (shared by digital output signals) + 4 points (common line shared)
I/O))
Input Signal ON OFF

Closed Open
For no-voltage contact (*1) (*2)
Resistance: 200 Ω or less Resistance: 100 kΩ or more
LOW HIGH
For voltage contact (*2)
Input voltage: −0.5 to 1 V DC Input voltage: 4.5 to 30 V DC
*1: Input contact rating: 5 V DC, 20 mA or more
Minimum pulse width: For YS1700 programmable mode
220 ms (control period of 200 ms)
Minimum pulse width: 120 ms for YS1700 multi-function mode and YS1500
*2: No-voltage contacts and voltage contacts may be received at the same terminals.
9-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Digital outputs
Digital output (basic type) 6 points (shared by digital input signals)
Digital output
(YS1700 basic type (with expandable 6 points (shared by digital input signals) + 4 points (minus line common)
I/O))
Transistor contact Rating 30 V DC, 200 mA or less (resistive load)
FAIL output (*1) 1 point
Transistor contact Rating 30 V DC, 200 mA or less (resistive load)
*1: FAIL contact output enters the OFF status at power OFF or failure.
For contact action (ON in normal condition), it is normally closed.
Isolation of Signals from Each Other

Expandable Terminal Signals of YS1700 Basic
Item YS1500/ YS1700 Basic Type
Type (with Expandable I/O)
Analog input and output Not isolated from the computation control circuit. Signals are not isolated from each other. The negative
signal line is shared. Isolated from other input and output signals.
With the exception of 2-wire transmitters (not
isolated), input signals are isolated from the
Direct input −
computation control circuit. Isolated from the power
supply circuit, and other input and output signals.
Isolated from the computation control circuit and
Isolated from the computation control circuit,
Digital input and output from other input and output signals, but not isolated
between the signals, and from other input and
signal between the signals (isolated between DI and DO).
output signals
The negative line is shared.
FAIL signal −
from other input and output signals
Communication
− 9
Power supply −
Specifications
Grounding −
Isolation Block Diagram
Grounding Grounding
Power supply Power supply
Communication
Analog input: 1 to 5 Analog input and (Optional code RS-485 communication or
output /A31 or /A32) DCS-LCS communication
Analog input: 6 to 8 (*2) Computation control
circuit Communication
Analog output: 1 to 3 Transmitter power Ethernet communication
(Optional code /A34)
Analog output: 4 (*2) supply
Programmer Direct input (optional
Transmitter power supply communication Direct input signal
RS-232C communication specifications) (*1)
Digital input/output Digital input: 6 to 10

DI/DO Expandable DI
(6 points shared) (*4) (*2), (*3)
Digital output: 6 to 10
FAIL output FAIL(DO) Expandable DO
(*2), (*3)
*1: With the exception of 2-wire transmitters (non-isolated)

*2: YS1700 basic type (with expandable I/O) only
*3: Minus line common
*4: Isolation between inputs and outputs
0901E.ai
IM 01B08B02-02EN 9-3
Transmitter Power Supply

Item Specifications
Output voltage 25 to 25.5 V DC
Load 60 mA or less (30 mA or less if there is direct input)
Short-circuit
80 mA ±10 mA
protection
No effect on the computation control circuit if a short circuit occurs.
Others Not isolated from the computation circuit.
An external resistor for 1–5 V conversion (250 Ω) should be provided.
Communication Signal Specifications

Programmer
DCS-LCS Ethernet
Item Communication RS-485 Communication
Communication Communication
(Used for YSS1000)
Complies with
Electrical Complies with EIA Yokogawa’s proprietary
Complies with RS-232C IEEE 802.3
Specifications RS-485 one
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Rear panel screw
Dedicated front panel terminals Back panel screw terminal Back panel RJ45
Connection
connector (Five terminals and the (2 terminals) connector
grounding terminal)
Up to 4-tier cascade stack
(10BASE-T)
Number Up to 2-tier stack
connectable 1 unit Maximum of 31 units/port 8 modules/LCS card (100BASE-TX) (*1)
instruments Number of connection: 2
Maximum number of
transactions: 1 (*3)
Dedicated cable A1053UR Shielded twisted-pair cable Dedicated shielded
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Applicable cable (USB/RS-232C Wire size: 0.5 to 1.25 mm2 twisted-pair cable
cable
conversion cable) (AWG No. 20 to 16) (Model: SCCD)
Cable length About 2.7 m Up to 1200m (1.25 mm2) Up to100 m 100 m (*2)
*1: Number of cascade connected hubs
*2: Maximum segment length (length between hub and YS1000)
*3: Per a connection
9-4 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Operating Conditions
 Normal operating conditions, transport and storage conditions
Item Normal Operation Transport and Storage
Ambient
0 to 50°C −20 to 60°C
temperature
5 to 90% RH 5 to 95% RH
Ambient humidity
(No condensation) (No condensation)
80 to 138 V AC (100 V AC and 24 V AC
Power Supply
common power supply) –
voltage (AC) (*1)
138 to 264 V AC (220 V AC power supply)
Power supply
50/60 Hz ±3Hz –
frequency (AC)
20 to 132 V DC (100 V AC and 24 V DC
Power Supply
common power supply) –
voltage (DC) (*1)
120 to 340 V DC (220 V AC power supply)
Continuous 5 to 14 Hz, amplitude : 0.625 mm or less
vibration 14 to 150 Hz, 4.9 m/s2 or less, orthogonal three-directional, with 2 hours each
Short-time
14.7 m/s2, 15 s or less
vibration
49 m/s2 (5 G) or less
Shock
11 ms or less
Package drop – Within 1 m
Magnetic field 400 A/m or less
Hazardous gas There shall be no corrosive gas in the location.
Installation
2000 m above the sea or less
altitude
Atmospheric
pressure
86 k to 106 kPa
9
*1: Safety standards, FM and CSA non-incendive standard compliant conditions apply at the
following rated power supply.
Specifications
Rated power supply: use of both AC and DC
100 V AC and 24 V DC common power supply
DC drive: 24 - 120 V DC (±10%), no polarity, 750 mA MAX.
AC drive: 100 - 120 V AC (±10%), 50/60 Hz (±3 Hz), 30 VA MAX.
220 V AC power supply
DC drive: 135 - 190 V DC (±10%), no polarity, 110 mA MAX.
AC drive: 220 - 240 V AC (±10%), 50/60 Hz (±3 Hz), 30 VA MAX.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 9-5
Reference Operating Conditions

Ambient temperature: 23°C ±2°C, relative humidity: 50% ±10% RH
Note that the power supply voltage is as specified below:
100 V AC and 24 V DC common power supply: 24 V DC or 100 V AC, 50/60 Hz
220 V AC power supply: 135 V DC or 220 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Reference Performance
Item Specifications
Input and output conversion
accuracy rating
1 to 5 V input signal ±0.1% of span
Direct input ±0.5% or ±(2 × |direct input card’s accuracy| + 0.1%)
Analog voltage output 2, 3 ±0.1% of span
Analog voltage output 4 ±0.2% of span
Analog current output ±0.2% of span
Allowable input voltage/current (*1)
1 to 5 V signal ±30 V DC
Direct input signal (mV, TC) −0.5 to 4 V DC
Direct input signal (distributor) 40 mA DC
1 minute (time taken by the instrument to reach accuracy after
Warm-up time
power on), but 3 minutes in the case of direct input
100 V AC and 24 V DC common power supply
750 mA (20 to 132 V DC)
Current consumption and power 30 VA (80 to 138 V AC)
consumption 220 V AC power supply
110 mA (120 to 340 V DC)
30 VA (138 to 264 V AC)
100 MΩ
Test voltage = 500 V DC
Insulation resistance
Input or output terminal to grounding terminal, power supply
terminal to grounding terminal
1000 VAC for one minute (In
the case of suffix codes -0,
Between input/output terminal -1, or -2)
and ground terminal 500 VAC for one minute (In
the case of suffix codes -3,
-4, or -5)
Withstand voltage
Between power supply 3000 VAC for one minute (In
terminal (L, N) and (all I/O the case of suffix codes -0,
terminal and ground terminal) -1, or -2)
Between power supply
terminal (L, N) and ground 1500 VAC for one minute
terminal
LCD replacement period 8 years
*1: Measurement category according to IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61010-2-201, IEC/EN 61010-
2-030: O (other)
Regarding the LCD

A small number of missing or steady-on LCD pixels and minor variations in brightness
uniformity is a normal display characteristic and not a malfunction.
9-6 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Influence of Operating Conditions

Item Specifications
Influence of power supply voltage
|Accuracy|
variations
Influence of input lead resistance 0.13% (per 1 kΩ)
|Accuracy|/5
Influence of load resistance 2 kΩ to ∞ 1 to 5 V output (analog output 2,3),
10 kΩ to ∞ 1 to 5 V output (analog output 4),
0 to 750 Ω 4 to 20 mA
Common mode noise rejection
83 dB (1 to 5 V input) 50/60 Hz
ratio
Series mode noise rejection ratio 46 dB (1 to 5 V input) 50/60 Hz
Influence of magnetic field |Accuracy|/5 (400 A/m, 50/60 Hz or DC)
Influence of ambient temperature |Accuracy| (per 10°C in the range of 0 to 50°C)
Influence of ambient humidity |Accuracy| (50 to 93% RH, 40°C)
Direct Input Specifications

Item mV Input Thermocouple Input
Optional code /A01 /A02
JIS, ANSI standards
Thermocouple types K, T, J, E, B, R,
DC potential difference:
Input signal and S
−50 to +150 mV
IEC and ANSI standards
Type N
10 to 63 mV (thermoelectric power
Measuring range span 10 to 100 mV DC
equivalent)
Measuring range zero
elevation
Within whichever is smaller, three
times the span or ±50 mV
Within whichever is smaller, three
times the span or ±25 mV
9
Measuring range Changeable on Engineering Display
Input resistor 1 MΩ (3 kΩ at power failure)
Specifications
External input resistor 500 Ω or less
Allowable input voltage
−0.5 to 4 V DC
and current
Input l linearization Not provided Provided
1 to 5 V output
Whichever is greater, ±0.2% of
conversion accuracy Within ±0.2% of span
span or input equivalent ±20 µV
rating
Reference junction
− Within ±1°C (*1)
compensation error
*1: Type B does not conduct reference junction temperature compensation.
For types other than type B, the value obtained by multiplying the noted value by the following
coefficient (K) applies if the measurement temperature is 0°C or less.
K = (thermoelectric power for 1°C near 0°C) / (thermoelectric power for 1°C at measurement
temperature)
Note: There is no difference between the latest and the previous temperature tables as
far as applying them to the YS1000.
- TC: Latest version; IEC60584-1: 2013/JIS C1602:2015
Previous version; IEC60584-1: 1995/JIS C1602:1995
- RTD Latest version; IEC60751- 2008/JIS C1604:2013
Previous version; IEC751- 1995/JIS C1604:1997
IM 01B08B02-02EN 9-7
Resistance Temperature
Item Potentiometer Input
Detector Input
Optional code /A03 /A04
RTD
Pt 100 (IPTS-68: JIS ’89),
JPt 100 (JIS ’89),
Input signal Pt 100 (ITS-90: JIS ’97), Potentiometer three-wire type
Pt 50 (JIS ’81)
Three-wire type
Measurement current: 1 mA
10 to 650°C (Pt 100) Total resistance: 100 to 2000 Ω
Measuring range span
10 to 500°C (JPt 100) Span: 80 to 2000 Ω
Measuring range zero
Within five times the span 50% or less of total resistance
elevation
External input resistance 10 Ω or less per wire (*1) 10 Ω or less per wire
Input linearization Provided Not provided
1 to 5 V output
Whichever is greater, ±0.2% of
span or ±0.2°C
rating
*1: The value shall be equal or less than the smaller value out of 10 Ω per wire or (measurement
temperature span) × 0.4 Ω.
2-wire Transmitter Input

Item Isolator (Isolated), 2-wire Transmitter
Input (Non-isolated)
Optional code /A05 /A06, /A07
4 to 20 mA DC signal from 2-wire
Input signal 1 to 5 V DC transmitter
(Power is supplied to a transmitter.)
Input resistance 1 MΩ (100 kΩ at power failure) 250Ω
RL = (20 − transmitter’s minimum
External input resistance − operating voltage)/0.02 A (Ω) or
less
Allowable input voltage
±30VDC 40mADC
and current
Input linearization Not provided Not provided
1 to 5 V output
rating
9-8 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Item Frequency Input

Optional code /A08
2-wire type: Contact, voltage pulse, current pulse (power supply to
Input signal transmitter is also possible)
3-wire type: Power supply type voltage pulse
Input frequency 0 to 10 kHz
100% frequency 0.1 to 10 kHz
Zero elevation 0 to 50% can be set for 100% input frequency.
Low level input cutoff Setting range: 0.01 Hz (and 1% of maximum frequency) to 100% input
point frequency.
Minimum input pulse ON: 60 µs, OFF: 60 µs (input frequency: 0 to 6 kHz)
width ON: 30 µs, OFF: 30 µs (input frequency: 6 to 10 kHz)
Contact input: relay contact, transistor contact
Open/close detection level: Open: 100 kΩ or more, Close: 200 Ω or
less
Contact capacity: 15 V DC, 15 mA or more
Input signal level
Voltage/current pulse input:
Low level: −1 to +8 V, High level: +3 to +24 V
Pulse peak value: 3 V or more (input frequency: 0 to 6 kHz)
5 V or more (input frequency: 6 to 10 kHz)
Internal load resistance
Selectable from 200 Ω, 500 Ω, and 1 kΩ; to be specified when ordering
(for current pulse input)
Selectable whether to add a 10 ms filter (for no-voltage contact); to be
Input filter
specified when ordering
Power supply for Selectable from 12 V DC at 30 mA, and 24 V DC at 30 mA; to be
transmitter specified when ordering
1 to 5 V output
conversion accuracy
rating
Within ±0.2% of span
9
Structure, Mounting (Basic Type)
Specifications
Item Specifications
Front panel drip and dust proof structure (compliant with IP54).
Structure Not applicable for side-by-side mounting instrumentation,
and replacement types.
Mounting type Indoor panel mounting
Panel mounting device Mounting brackets to be used (at the top and bottom))
Panel cutout 137+2 × 68+0.7 (mm)
External signal
M4-screw terminal connection
connection
Connection
method Power supply
and grounding M4-screw terminal connection
connection
External Dimensions 144 × 72 × 250 mm (height × width × depth from the panel)
Weight 1.6kg
IM 01B08B02-02EN 9-9
Safety Standards
 General safety standards (suffix codes -0, -1, or -2 only)
IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61010-2-201, IEC/EN 61010-2-030 compliant
Overvolatage category: II, Pollution degree: 2
Measurement category: O (other)
When option code /A08 is specified, the conformity to CE marking is excluded.
Compliant with CAN/CSA-C22.2 for suffix codes -0, -1, or -2 and option
code /CSA
CSA: CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 61010-1 and CAN/CSA-C22.2, NO. 61010-2-030
Overvoltage category: II Pollution
Degree: 2
Measurement category: O (other)
Notes regarding safety standards

1) The internal unit alone is not covered by the safety standards.
The products comply with the safety standards when configured in combination
with the internal unit and the safety standard-compliant case or safety standard-
compliant housing.
2) The following work involving removing the internal unit from the case and
reinstalling it in the case requires safety verification, as specified by the safety
standards (IEC/EN 61010-1).
Such work must be carried out by a YOKOGAWA engineer or by YOKOGAWA-
approved personnel and must be subjected to inspection (such as withstand tests)
to verify safety. If the work is carried out at the customer’s own risk, the instrument
concerned cannot be regarded as being compatible with the safety standards.
[1] Removal of the internal unit from the case, replacing the internal unit with a new
one, and subsequently installing it to the case/housing
[2] Replacement and installation of the power supply unit, or optional board
[3] Maintenance or repair requiring removal of the internal unit from the case
 EMC standards (suffix codes -0, -1, or -2 only)

Use a ferrite core and an arrester to comply with the standards.
EN61326-1 Class A, Table 2 (For use in industrial locations)
EN61326-2-3
EN55011 Class A Group 1
EN61000-3-2 Class A
EN61000-3-3
Note: The instrument continues operating at a measuring accuracy of within ±20% of
the range during testing.
KC marking: Electromagnetic wave interference prevention standard, electromagnetic

wave protection standard compliance.
The suffix codes -x0x, -x1x, -x2x -x3x, and -x4x for YS1000 series and YSS1000
comply with KC marking.
EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and New Zealand
EN 55011 Class A, Group 1
CAUTION
This instrument is a class A product (use in commercial and industrial areas). In a
domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the
user needs to take adequate measures.
When option code /A08 is specified, the conformity to CE marking is excluded.
9-10 IM 01B08B02-02EN
 Hazardous location usage certification: Non-incendive electric equipment that

is used in hazardous locations (optional code /FM, /CSA only)
FM nonincendive: Class 3600:2011
Class 3611:2004
Class 3810:2005
Locations: Class I, Division 2, Groups A,B,C and D
Class I, Zone 2, Groups II C
Temperature Code: T4
CSA nonincendive: C22. 2 No. 213-M1987
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 0-10
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 0.4-04
Locations: Class I, Division 2, Groups A,B,C and D
Temperature Code: T4
Hazardous location usage conditions: (Note 2), (Note 6)
Hazardous (Classified) Hazardous (Classified) Non-hazardous (Classified)

Location Location Location
Class I, Division 2, Class I, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C, D Groups A, B, C, D

Associated YS1000 Series Control
Apparatus Single-loop Equipment
Controller (Note 1)
9
(Note 3)
(Note 4)
Specifications
(Note 5)
0601E.ai
Non-incendive Field Wiring Parameter:

Output signal Signal name Voc (V) Isc (mA) Ca (uF) La (mH) Remark
Analog Output (Y1, Y3I) Current output 23.5 21.0 0.3 10
Analog Output (Y2, Y3V, Y4) Voltage output 5.25 6.3 0.9 50
Loop power supply for Power supply 25.5 90 0.2 1 *1
transmitter (LPS)
Digital Input (DI1 to DI10) Non-voltage contact 7.25 20 0.9 50
RS-485 4.4 250 0.9 1
The Non-incendive field wiring concept allows interconnection of two FM Approved Non-incendive
Apparatuses with Non-incendive field wiring parameters not specifically examined in combination
as a system when:
Voc ≤ Vmax, Isc ≤ Imax, Ca ≥ Ci + C cable, La ≥ Li + L cable
*1: Upon condition that a shunt resistor YS021 (250 Ω ±0.1%, 3W) is attached.
Input signal Signal name Vmax (V) Imax (mA) Ci (uF) Li (mH) Remark
Analog Input (X1 to X8) Voltage input 30 0.034 0.001 0
Digital Output (DO1 to Transister output 30 200 0 0 *2
DO10)
DCS-LCS Transister output 8.5 24 0.0001 0.07
Communication
The Non-incendive field wiring concept allows interconnection of two FM Approved Non-incendive
Apparatuses with Non-incendive field wiring parameters not specifically examined in combination
as a system when:
Voc or Vt ≤ Vmax, Isc or It ≤ Imax. Ca ≥ Ci + C cable, La ≥ Li + L cable
*2: Class I, Division 2 Wiring required.
IM 01B08B02-02EN 9-11
Notes:
1. Control equipment connected to the YS1000 series single-loop controller must not use or
generate more than 250 Vrms or VDC.
2. In case of option code /FM, install devices according to NEC (National Electrical Code: ANSI/
NFPA-70). In case of option code /CSA, all wiring shall comply with Canadian Electrical Code
Part I and local electrical codes.
3. For the YS1000 with FM option, be sure to use the associated apparatus that must be FM
Approval under Non-incendive Field Wiring Concept, or to use a simple apparatus (a device
which can neither generate nor store more than 1.2 V, 0.1 A, 25 mW, or 20 µJ, e.g. Switches,
thermocouples, LED's and RTD's).
4. Associated Apparatus manufacture's installation drawing must be followed when installing this
equipment.
5. Associated Apparatus connection is representative of each input and output signal connection.
Each signal shall be wired in a separate shielded cable.
6. No revision to drawing without prior FM and CSA Approval.
Parameter of the Device which Gives Energy

Voc: maximum open-circuit output voltage
Maximum voltage that occurs at the open terminal (part) when the Non-
incendive (NI) circuit is open
Isc: maximum short-circuit output current
Maximum current which currents when the NI circuit is short and earth fault
Ca: maximum allowable capacitance
Maximum capacitance that can be connected to the NI circuit
La: maximum allowable inductance
Maximum inductance that can be connected to the NI circuit
Parameter of the Device which Receives Energy

Vmax: maximum input voltage
Maximum voltage that maintains the NI properties of the device
Imax: maximum input current
Maximum current that maintains the properties of the device
Ci: maximum internal capacitance
Maximum internal capacitance of the device that can be considered to conduct
to the NI circuit (the external wiring) when the device is connected to the NI
circuit (the external wiring)
Li: maximum internal inductance
Maximum internal inductance of the device that can be considered to conduct to
the NI circuit (the external wiring) when the device is connected to the NI circuit
(the external wiring)
9-12 IM 01B08B02-02EN
Index
Numeric I
10-segment Linearizer........................................................... 2-2 Indication Accuracy............................................................... 8-1
Input Filter............................................................................. 2-1
A
Active Color Display............................................................. 2-11 K
Adjustable Setpoint Filter................................................... 1-114 Keylock................................................................................ 4-12
Alarm Function.................................................................... 2-13
Alternate Tag Number Color Display................................... 2-12 L
Analog Outputs.................................................................... 3-14
LCD backlight off................................................................... 3-7
Application Guide................................................................ 7-24
LCD Brightness.................................................................... 4-11
Automatic Control.................................................. 1-7,1-27,1-55
Local/remote switching.......................................................... 3-6
Automatic operation backup mode...................... 1-11,1-34,1-63
Loop Colors......................................................................... 4-10
Automatic switching......................................................... 3-4,3-7
Low Cutoff Adjustable............................................................ 2-1
B M
Background color................................................................ 4-10
Manual Control...................................................... 1-7,1-27,1-55
Backup mode...................................................... 1-11,1-34,1-63
Manual operation backup mode.......................... 1-11,1-34,1-63
Batch PID Control.............................................................. 1-126
Manual switching............................................................. 3-4,3-7
Burnout.................................................................................. 5-5
Messages.............................................................................. 2-9
Multi-function mode......................................................... 1-1,1-2
C
Calibration Instruments......................................................... 8-1 N
Cascade Mode.................................................................... 1-23
Neutralization Control.................................... 1-117,1-119,1-122
Cascade setting automatic control...................... 1-11,1-34,1-62
Neutralization Process........................................................ 7-25
Cascade Setting Value Tracking............................................ 2-5
Non-linear PID Control....................................................... 1-117
Cascade switching................................................................ 3-7
Contact Type................................................................... 3-2,3-3
Control elements................................................... 1-6,1-26,1-54 O
Controller Mode..................................................................... 1-1 OFF timer.............................................................................. 4-9
Control Method.................................................................. 1-104 OPEN and CLOSE...................................................... 1-28,1-33 Index
Control operation direction.................................................... 2-7 Open/close........................................................................... 3-11
Control Operation Formula ALG........................................ 1-104 Open/close switching............................................................ 3-6
Index
Control period.................................................................. 1-1,1-2 Operation Display............................................................ 4-1,4-8
Control Type...................................................................... 1-104 Output Limiter.................................................................... 1-108
Current/voltage switching.................................................... 3-13 Output preset and manual switching..................................... 3-5
Output Tracking..................................................................... 2-4
D Output tracking switching...................................................... 3-5
DDC mode........................................................... 1-11,1-34,1-62
Dead Time......................................................................... 1-124 P
Deletion Guide Display Language....................................... 2-10 Part Replacement.................................................................. 8-3
Digital Input and Output......................................................... 3-1 Password............................................................................. 4-13
Direct Input............................................................................ 5-1 PID Control with Reset Bias............................................... 1-112
Display Data on the TREND 3 Display.................................. 4-5 Power-on initial display.......................................................... 4-8
Display Function.................................................................... 4-1 Preset MV.............................................................................. 2-8
During Power Failures........................................................... 6-1 Preset MV switching.............................................................. 3-5
Preset PID......................................................................... 1-127
E Process Variable Tracking..................................................... 2-6
Programmable Mode......................................................... 1-103
EMC standards.................................................................... 9-10
Proportional (PD) Control.................................................. 1-109
Event Display........................................................................ 2-9
PV Derivative Type PID..................................................... 1-107
Event flag............................................................................ 2-10
PV Proportional Type......................................................... 1-106
F R
Feedforward Control.......................................................... 1-121
Ratio Operation..................................................................... 2-3
First-order Lag Operation...................................................... 2-1
REMOTE and LOCAL......................................................... 1-63
Remote/local........................................................................ 3-11
H Repair.................................................................................... 8-4
Hazardous location usage certification................................. 9-11 Reset windup........................................................... 1-108,1-112
Hysteresis............................................................................ 2-14
IM 01B08B02-02EN Index-1
Index
S
Safety Standards................................................................. 9-10
Sample-and-hold PI Control.............................................. 1-124
Scale..................................................................................... 4-7
Scale Divisions................................................................ 4-6,4-7
Security Function................................................................. 4-12
Selector Mode..................................................................... 1-51
Selector selection.................................................................. 3-6
Self-tuning............................................................................. 7-1
Self-tuning Alarms............................................................... 7-20
Self-tuning switching............................................................. 3-6
Sensor Type.......................................................................... 5-4
Simulation Display............................................................... 2-10
Simulation Test.................................................................... 7-22
Single-loop Mode.................................................................. 1-3
Span Adjustment................................................................... 5-6
SPC mode........................................................... 1-11,1-34,1-62
Specifications........................................................................ 9-1
Square Root Extraction......................................................... 2-1
Status output................................................................. 3-9,3-11
Step Response................................................................... 1-114
T
Time Span............................................................................. 4-4
Tracking................................................................................. 2-4
TREND Display............................................................... 4-3,4-4
V
Valve Direction....................................................................... 2-7
Z
Zero Adjustment.................................................................... 5-6
Index-2 IM 01B08B02-02EN
i
Revision Information
 Title : YS1500 Indicating Controller/YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller
User’s Manual
 Manual No. : IM 01B08B02-02EN
Jun. 2014/1st Edition

Newly published
May 2015/2nd Edition

FM, CSA nonincendive (optional) approvals. (excluing the compatible type for YS100)
Mar. 2016/3rd Edition

Safety standard IEC/EN 61010-2-201 conformity.
May 2016/3rd Edition

Page 6-2, Error correction (change the “analog output terminals Y5 to Y8” to “analog output registers Y5, Y6”.)
Dec 2019/4th Edition

Page 9-4, Description of maximum number of transactions
Page 9-10, Description of the notice of alteration contents (standards related)

n Written by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
n Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN

Blank Page
YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
Headquarters
9-32, Nakacho, 2-chome, Musashino-shi, Tokyo, 180-8750 JAPAN
Phone : 81-422-52-5555
Branch Sales Offices
Osaka, Nagoya, Kurashiki, Hiroshima, Fukuoka, Kitakyusyu
YOKOGAWA CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Head Office
12530 West Airport Blvd, Sugar Land, Texas 77478, USA
Phone : 1-281-340-3800 Fax : 1-281-340-3838
Georgia Office
2 Dart Road, Newnan, Georgia 30265, USA
Phone : 1-800-888-6400 Fax : 1-770-254-0928
YOKOGAWA AMERICA DO SUL LTDA.

Praca Acapulco, 31 - Santo Amaro, Sáo Paulo/SP, BRAZIL, CEP-04675-190
Phone : 55-11-5681-2400 Fax : 55-11-5681-4434
YOKOGAWA EUROPE B. V.
Euroweg 2, 3825 HD Amersfoort, THE NETHERLANDS
Phone : 31-88-4641000 Fax : 31-88-4641111
YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CIS LTD.

Grokholsky per 13 Building 2, 4th Floor 129090, Moscow, RUSSIA
Phone : 7-495-737-7868 Fax : 7-495-737-7869
YOKOGAWA CHINA CO., LTD.

3F Tower D Cartelo Crocodile Building, No.568 West Tianshan Road,
Shanghai 200335, CHINA
Phone : 86-21-62396262 Fax : 86-21-62387866
YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CO., LTD.

(Yokogawa B/D, Yangpyeong-dong 4-Ga), 21, Seonyu-ro 45-gil, Yeongdeungpo-gu,
Seoul, 07209, KOREA
Phone : 82-2-2628-6000 Fax : 82-2-2628-6400
YOKOGAWA ENGINEERING ASIA PTE. LTD.

5 Bedok South Road, Singapore 469270, SINGAPORE
Phone : 65-6241-9933 Fax : 65-6241-2606
YOKOGAWA INDIA LTD.

Plot No.96, Electronic City Complex, Hosur Road, Bangalore - 560 100, INDIA
Phone : 91-80-4158-6000 Fax : 91-80-2852-0625
YOKOGAWA AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

Tower A, 112-118 Talavera Road, Macquarie Park NSW 2113, AUSTRALIA
Phone : 61-2-8870-1100 Fax : 61-2-8870-1111
YOKOGAWA MIDDLE EAST & AFRICA B.S.C.(C)

P.O. Box 10070, Manama, Building 577, Road 2516, Busaiteen 225, Muharraq,
BAHRAIN
Phone : 973-17-358100 Fax : 973-17-336100
Oct. '18

YS1500 Indicating Controller YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller User's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

YS1500 Indicating Controller YS1700 Programmable Indicating Controller User's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User’s

User’s Manual Func ment

4th Edition : Dec 2019 (YK)

Chapter Title and Description

Indicates related operations or explanations for the user’s reference.

Chapter 2 Auxiliary Control Function

Chapter 3 Auxiliary Input and Output Functions

1.1 Selecting the Controller Mode (CTL) 1

Display) > + keys (to the Engineering Menu Display)

> [CONFIG1] software key (Configuration Display 1)

Parameter Name Setting Range Factory Default

Cascade mode (CAS) ► 1.1.2

Selector mode (SELECT) ► 1.1.3

YS1500 Control Function

Single-loop mode (SINGLE) ► 1.1.1

Cascade mode (CAS) ► 1.1.2

Selector mode (SELECT) ► 1.1.3

YS1700 Control Function

1.1.1 Control in the Single-loop Mode (CTL = SINGLE) 1

ON ON Input filter Input filter

OFF Gain and bias

C/A external switching PV1

PF key operation Self-tuning Control elements

STC start (Note 1)

C, A/M external switching

*1: Expandable I/O terminal of YS1700 basic type

Y3 Y4 Y2 Y1 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO7

n Single-loop Control Function

Main parameter functions

n Automatic Control/Manual Control 1

Parameter Name Setting Range Factory Default

Automatic control (A) if the “A” mode key is pressed

(1) Performing control using YS1000 only

Parameter Name Setpoint

Process variable (PV1)

Manipulated output variable (MV1)

Automatic control AUT 1

*: Operation does not change even if the C mode key is pressed.

Display Status of the Instrument's Front Panel in Each Operation Mode

Setpoints and Manipulated Output Variables in Each Operation Mode

Control Status Effected Instantly Upon Transition to Each Operation Mode

n Automatic Control/Manual Control/Cascade Setting Automatic Control

Automatic control (A) if the “A” mode key is pressed

Cascade setting automatic control (C mode) 1

Cascade Mode Communication

Cascade setting automatic control SPC mode (*)

Automatic operation backup mode (BUA):

Manual operation backup mode (BUM):

(1) Performing control based on an external setpoint from analog input 1

Parameter Name Setpoint

Cascade setting input Measurement input

Process variable (PV1)

An analog cascade Control element

Manipulated output variable (MV1)

Cascade setting automatic control Automatic AUT

Manual control AUT A : Pressing the “A” mode key

C M AUT, MAN, CAS:

Display Status of the Instrument's Front Panel in Each Operation Mode

Status Effected Instantly Upon Transition to Each Operation Mode 1

(2) Performing control based on an external setpoint through communication, or backup

YS1000 accepts an external setpoint through communication to perform control. If the

Parameter Name Setpoint

Register Name Setpoint